Me 51221 R 08 A Gauging 335220150816

GAUGING SYSTEMS
OSP-E100M / OSP-E10M
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
(8th Edition)
Pub No. 4297-E-R6 (ME51-221-R8) Aug. 2004
4297-E P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Eeoemr5pl001
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel
and the machine
itself from hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively
on these safety devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented
below to ensure accident-free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards
which Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.
1.
Precautions Relating to Machine Installation

(1) Install the machine at a site where the following conditions (the conditionsEeoemr5pl002
for achievement of
the guaranteed accuracy) apply.
Ambient temperature: 17 to 25C
Ambient humidity: 40% to 75% at 20C (no condensation)
Site not subject to direct sunlight or excessive vibration; environment as free of dust, acid,
corrosive gases, and salt spray as possible.
(2) Prepare a primary power supply that complies with the following requirements.
Voltage: 200 V
Voltage fluctuation: 10% max.
Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz
Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major
noise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this could
cause malfunction of the CNC unit.
If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is no
choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large amount
of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).
(3) Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the control enclosure.
Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.
Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.
Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessive vibrations or shock.
The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 0 to 40C.
The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is 30 to 95% (no condensation).
The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).
2.
Points to Check before Turning on the Power

(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent
the entry of water,
Eeoemr5pl003
chips, and dust.
(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there
are no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.
(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL
ON switch on the operation panel.
4297-E P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.
Precautions Relating to Operation

(1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance
with the daily
Eeoemr5pl004
inspection procedure described in this instruction manual.
(2) Use tools whose dimensions and type are appropriate for the work undertaken and the machine
specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents.
(3) Do not, for any reason, touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the
spindle could rotate: this is dangerous.
(4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured.
(5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous.
(6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always
stop the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom.
(7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the
machine with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so.
(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.
(9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating.
(10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous.
(11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.
4.
Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, Eeoemr5pl010
but it is possible that
a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to danger:
do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.
(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.
(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause misoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips further
in.
(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the
power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.
5.
On Finishing Work
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.
Eeoemr5pl005
(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.
(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.
(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the
main power disconnect switch.
4297-E P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6.
Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Trouble Occurs
Eeoemr5pl006
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential
to observe the
following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has
occurred.
(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the
machine.
(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need to
be taken.
(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.
(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.
(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were
and secure them properly with their screws, etc.
(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.
(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.
(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.
(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure
a) Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.
b) Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in the
MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permitted to
perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.
MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)
The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.
c) The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory is
supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are handled,
the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service personnel
should handle these boards.
(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure
a) Cleaning the cooling unit
The cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive temperature
rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit. Inspect the following points every three months.
Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?
The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.
Is the external air inlet blocked?
If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.
4297-E P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
7.
General Precautions
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.
Eeoemr5pl007
(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.
(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine operators must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.
(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct procedure before operating the machine.
(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.
(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain highvoltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.
(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.
8.
Symbols Used in This Manual

Eeoemr5pl008
The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information
of particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.
DANGER
Indicates an imminent hazard which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates hazards which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates hazards which, if not avoided, could result in minor injuries or damage to devices
or equipment.
NOTICE
Indicates precautions relating to operation or use.
4297-E P-(i)
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Eeoemr5an001
Thank you very much for choosing our CNC system. This numerical control system
is a expandable
CNC with various features including a multi-main CPU system. Major features of the CNC system
are described below.
(1) Expandable CNC with a multi-main CPU system
A multi-main CPU system on which up to seven engines (main CPUs) can be mounted is used.
An excellent performance and cost effectiveness have been realized as a leader of increasingly
rapid and accurate machine tools. The CNC system can be adapted to any models and variations by changing the construction of the main CPUs. The machine is controlled by a built-in
PLC.
(2) Compact and highly reliable
The CNC system has become compact and highly reliable because of advanced hardware
technology, including UCMB (Universal Compact Main Board), I/O link, and servo link. The
variable software as a technical philosophy of the OSPs supported by a flash memory. Functions may be added to the CNC system as required after delivery.
(3) NC operation panels
The following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.
Color CRT operation panels
Thin color operation panels (horizontal)
Thin color operation panels (vertical)
One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.
(4) Machining management functions
These functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability from small quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major control functions are described below.
a) Reduction of setup time
With increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently
needed. The simplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents
necessary for setup, such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controlling drawings and further reduce the setup time.
b) Production Status Monitor
The progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the
CNC system.
c) Reduction of troubleshooting time
Correct information is quickly available for troubleshooting.
(5) Help functions
When an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm.
This helps take quick action against the alarm.
To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this
instruction manual before use.
Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.
Screens
Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the
screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown in
this manual.
4297-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL
BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION ........................................................1
1. Overview....................................................................................................................................... 1
1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging .......................................................................................... 2
1-2. Function Menu ....................................................................................................................... 3
2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Operation ............................. 9
2-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point .................................................................................. 10
2-2. Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table .............................................................................. 15
2-3. Operation Mode Designation............................................................................................... 16
2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function ............................................................................... 18
2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H) ........................................................ 22
2-6. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection .................................................................................... 23
2-7. Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage
Detection Cycle ................................................................................................................... 28
2-8. New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection Cycle ................................................................................................... 30
3. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for
Special Tools and Attachments .................................................................................................. 34
3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for
Horizontal Tools of MCM ..................................................................................................... 34
3-2. Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection on
B/C-axis Attachments, 90 Angular Attachments and Extension Attachments (Option) ..... 41
3-3. Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection with
30 Angular Attachments (Option) ....................................................................................... 50
4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)........................................................ 62
4-1. Setting the Y-axis Escape Position...................................................................................... 62
4-2. Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter Radius Compensation)/
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle .......................................................................... 63
5. Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II During Execution of the
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle.................................. 64
5-1. Touch Sensor Operation Interlock ....................................................................................... 64
5-2. Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/
Tool Breakage Detection Cycle ........................................................................................... 64
6. Variables Used in Subprograms ................................................................................................. 66
6-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables .................................................................................. 66
6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools) ........................................... 69
6-3. How to Use Variables .......................................................................................................... 72
7. Cautions on Operation................................................................................................................ 80
8. Program Examples ..................................................................................................................... 82
8-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset .............................................................................................. 82
4297-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8-2. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection .................................................................................... 84
9. Alarm List.................................................................................................................................... 87
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION ........................................................94

1. Overview..................................................................................................................................... 94
1-1. Dimension Check Function.................................................................................................. 94
1-2. Automatic Zero Offset Function ........................................................................................... 94
2. Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function............................................................................ 95
2-1. Setting the Datum Hole Zero Point ...................................................................................... 96
2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation.................................................................................... 98
2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset ............................................................................................... 103
2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function .............................................................................. 105
2-5. Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function ............................................................................ 107
2-6. End Face Gauging Cycle................................................................................................... 110
2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results ...................................................................................... 115
2-8. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points................................................ 116
2-9. Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces ........................................ 118
2-10.Automatic Zero Offset Function........................................................................................ 121
2-11.Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data.............................................................................. 122
3. Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90 Angular and
Extension Attachments (Option) ............................................................................................... 123
3-1. Automatic Gauging for 90 Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment (PAB=90)... 125
3-2. Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis Attachment (PAB=0)......... 126
4. Power ON/OFF Cycle of Renishaw's Optical Touch Probe (MP7/MP9/MP10) ....................... 127
4-1. Power ON/OFF Cycle Commands .................................................................................... 127
4-2. Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation ....................................................................................... 128
5. Details ....................................................................................................................................... 130
5-1. Touch Probe Movements .................................................................................................. 130
5-2. Approach Speed to the Workpiece .................................................................................... 133
5-3. Variables Used in Subprograms ........................................................................................ 135
6. Touch Probe Safety Measures ................................................................................................. 147
6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation ............................................................................... 147
6-2. Replacing the Touch Probe Battery................................................................................... 148
7. Supplementary Information....................................................................................................... 149
8. Program Examples ................................................................................................................... 151
8-1. ID Gauging ........................................................................................................................ 151
8-2. OD Gauging....................................................................................................................... 152
8-3. End Face Gauging on Z-axis ............................................................................................. 153
8-4. Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction) ................................................................ 154
8-5. Automatic Zero Offset........................................................................................................ 155
4297-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8-6. Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle ................................................................. 156
9. Examples of Gauging Result Display ....................................................................................... 159
10.Alarm List.................................................................................................................................. 162
10-1.Alarm List.......................................................................................................................... 162
10-2.Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart (Alarm B 2305)................................................. 164
SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION ..................................................170

1. Overview................................................................................................................................... 170
1-1. Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 170
1-2. Output Operation ............................................................................................................... 171
1-3. Example Program .............................................................................................................. 172
1-4. Example of Outputs ........................................................................................................... 173
1-5. Output Items ...................................................................................................................... 174
2. Interface Specifications for Connecting VP-600 ....................................................................... 175
2-1. Connection Diagram.......................................................................................................... 175
2-2. Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 176
SECTION 4 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE .......................................................177

1. Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 177
2. Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 177
2-1. NC Optional Parameter Bit ................................................................................................ 177
3. Designation of Displaying Device ............................................................................................. 178
4. Print Command......................................................................................................................... 178
4-1. System Variables for Printing ............................................................................................ 179
SECTION 5 MANUAL GAUGING ................................................................................181

1. Overview................................................................................................................................... 181
1-1. Specifications .................................................................................................................... 181
1-2. Overview of Manual Gauging Functions............................................................................ 182
1-3. List of Display Screens ...................................................................................................... 186
2. Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................ 187
3. Preparation for Gauging ........................................................................................................... 188
3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles ............................................ 188
3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle.......................................................... 195
4. Work Gauging........................................................................................................................... 197
4-1. End Face Gauging (X, Y, Z) .............................................................................................. 197
4-2. I.D. Center Gauging........................................................................................................... 202
4-3. O.D. Center Gauging ......................................................................................................... 207
4-4. Internal Faces Center Gauging ......................................................................................... 213
4-5. External Faces Center Gauging ........................................................................................ 225
4297-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-6. Inclination and Corner Gauging ......................................................................................... 237
5. Tool Length Gauging ................................................................................................................ 244
6. Cutter Radius Gauging ............................................................................................................. 247
7. Comparison and Calculation of Gauging Results ..................................................................... 250
7-1. Transferring Gauging Results............................................................................................ 250
7-2. Comparison with Gauging Data......................................................................................... 252
7-3. Example of Calculation Results Display ............................................................................ 252
8. Error List ................................................................................................................................... 255
SECTION 6 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION....................................................257

1. Specifications............................................................................................................................ 257
2. List of Display Screen ............................................................................................................... 258
3. Switches ................................................................................................................................... 259
3-1. Main Operation Panel ........................................................................................................ 259
3-2. Interactive Gauging Operation Panel ................................................................................ 261
4. Terminology .............................................................................................................................. 262
5. Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................ 264
6. Outline of Interactive Gauging Function ................................................................................... 265
7. Work Gauging Function ............................................................................................................ 271
7-1. PARAMETER (WORK) Screen ......................................................................................... 271
7-2. PREPARATION (WORK) Screen ...................................................................................... 272
7-3. X, Y, Z END FACE ............................................................................................................ 278
7-4. I.D. CENTER ..................................................................................................................... 282
7-5. O.D. CENTER ................................................................................................................... 285
7-6. INT END CENTER ............................................................................................................ 287
7-7. EXT END CENTER ........................................................................................................... 290
7-8. INCLINE, CORNER........................................................................................................... 293
8. Tool Length Gauging ................................................................................................................ 296
8-1. Parameter (Tool Length) ................................................................................................... 296
8-2. Preparation (Tool Length).................................................................................................. 297
8-3. Tool Length Gauging ......................................................................................................... 300
9. Other Supplementary Explanations .......................................................................................... 303
10.Operation Flow ......................................................................................................................... 305
11.Error List ................................................................................................................................... 306
SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION.........................308

1. What is Non-contact Sensor? ................................................................................................... 308
2. Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 309
3. Maker's Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode.................................................................. 310
4. Maker's Subprogram in the Fixed Sensor Mode....................................................................... 330
4297-E P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5. Maker's Subprogram for Gauging a Vertical Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode.............. 331
6. Maker's Subprogram for Gauging a Horizontal Spindle Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode.......... 345
7. List of Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 359
SECTION 8 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR

HORIZONTAL MC ...................................................................................360
2. Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 361
3. Gauging with the Fixed Sensor................................................................................................. 361
4. Each Manufacturer's Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor........................................................... 362
5. List of Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 380
SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC ......................381

1. Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 381
2. Detailed Specifications ............................................................................................................. 381
2-1. Parameter Setting.............................................................................................................. 381
2-2. Setting Items...................................................................................................................... 382
2-3. Barrier Range Setting Example ......................................................................................... 383
2-4. Barrier Alarm and Resetting Method ................................................................................. 383
3. Alarms....................................................................................................................................... 384
3-1. Alarm A.............................................................................................................................. 384
SECTION 10NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF.........385

2. Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 386
3. Manufacturer's Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor .................................................................... 387
4. Manufacturer's Subprogram for Gauging Vertical Spindle Tools with the Fixed Sensor .......... 387
5. List of Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 406
SECTION 11NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30/45 AT

(103 VERSIONS) .....................................................................................407
2. Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 408
3. Manufacturer's Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor .................................................................... 409
4. Manufacturer's Subprogram for 30/45 AT Tool Gauging by the Fixed Sensor ...................... 410
5. List of Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 428
4297-E P-1
SECTION 1 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION
SECTION 1
1.
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/

AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION
Overview
Eeoemr5s1001
The automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function automatically
calculates
the tool offset data and detects breakage (chipping) of tools such as drills, taps, reamers and boring
bars.
The specifications of this function are classified into the following two types.
Specifications for automatic tool length offset only, and
Specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection
A touch sensor is mounted in the machine: a tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with
this touch sensor to determine the tool offset data and to detect if the tool has been broken.
For tools which are mounted and removed without using the ATC, refer to the section Tool Management Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
(1) Automatic Tool Length Offset
With the tool length offset function, the tool mounted in the spindle is brought into contact with
the touch sensor to calculate the tool length. A subprogram prepared for this purpose is used
for this operation.
(2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
With the automatic tool breakage detection function, the same contact detection cycle as used
for the tool length offset function is executed to obtain the tool length.
The function compares the obtained tool length with the tool length offset data stored in the
CNC memory to judge if the tool has been broken.
If the tool is found to have been broken, it is replaced with a spare tool.
4297-E P-2
1-1.
Displaying the Result of Gauging

Eeoemr5s1004
Display the screen that displays the gauging result (GAUGING RESULTS screen)
by following the
steps indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Select an operation mode (automatic, MDI, manual).
2 Press function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).
The DISPLAY CHANGE window opens.
3 In the DISPLAY CHANGE window, select GAUGING RESULTS.
4 Press function key [F8] (CLOSE).
The GAUGING RESULTS screen, shown below, is displayed.
EIOEMR5S1001R01
4297-E P-3
1-2.
Function Menu
The function menu switches as shown below to display the functions relating Eeoemr5s1005
to the gauging result
when the extend key, to the right of function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE), is pressed.
EIOEMR5S1002R01
When the extend key is pressed.
EIOEMR5S1003R01
The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below.

Function Menu
TOOL/ZERO
Description
Displays the presently set zero offset/tool offset number.
MSB ZERO ON/OFF
Displays the offset data presently set for the individual zero offset numbers.
MSB TOOL ON/OFF
Displays the offset data presently set for the tool length offset number
and the cutter diameter offset number.
SENSstat ON/OFF
Displays the value set for system variable VNCOM and the sensor contact status.
VARIOUS ON/OFF
Displays the values set for the system variables.
For details on the function keys, refer to [1-2-1. TOOL/ZERO Function Key] to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/
OFF Function Key].
4297-E P-4
1-2-1. TOOL/ZERO Function Key

The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window displays the presently set zero offset numberEeoemr5s1006
and tool offset numbers. To display the TOOL/ZERO pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Display the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
For the procedure used to display the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to [1-1. Displaying the
Result of Gauging].
2 Press the extend key to switch the function menu.
3 Press function key [F2] (TOOL/ZERO).
The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window opens.
EIOEMR5S1004R01
The TOOL/ZERO pop-up window closes when function key [F2] (TOOL/ZERO) is pressed
again.
4297-E P-5
1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key
Eeoemr5s1007
The MSB (VSZO[N]) pop-up window displays the offset data set for the individual
zero offset numbers. To display the MSB (VSZO[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
Result of Gauging].
3 Press function key [F4] (MSB ZERO ON/OFF).
The MSB (VSZO[N]) pop-up window opens.
EIOEMR5S1005R01
The MSB (VSZO[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F4] (MSB ZERO ON/OFF) is
pressed again.
4297-E P-6
1-2-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key

The TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION pop-up window displays the offset dataEeoemr5s1008
set for the individual
tool length offset and cutter radius compensation numbers. To display the TOOL OFFSET/COMPENSATION pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
Result of Gauging].
3 Press function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF).
The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N])
pop-up window opens.
EIOEMR5S1006R01
The MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB CUTR RADIUS COMP (VSTOD[N])
pop-up window closes when function key [F5] (MSB TOOL ON/OFF) is pressed again.
4297-E P-7
1-2-4. SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key

The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window displays the valuesEeoemr5s1009
set for system variables VNCOM and the contact status of the sensor. To display the NC COMMUNICATION
(VNCOM[N]) pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
Result of Gauging].
3 Press function key [F6] (SENSstat ON/OFF).
The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window opens.
EIOEMR5S1007R01
The NC COMMUNICATION (VNCOM[N]) pop-up window closes when function key [F6]
(SENSstat ON/OFF) is pressed again.
4297-E P-8
1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key

The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window displays the values set for the individual Eeoemr5s1010
system variables. To
display the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, follow the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
Result of Gauging].
3 Press function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF).
The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window opens.
EIOEMR5S1010R01
The VARIOUS DATA pop-up window closes when function key [F7] (VARIOUS ON/OFF) is
pressed again.
4297-E P-9
2.
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Operation
A general breakdown of the operational procedure for carrying out automaticEeoemr5s1011
tool length and tool
breakage detection functions is given below.
Setting the zero point for the

touch sensor
Setting the correspondence

between pot numbers/tool
numbers
Executing the automatic tool
length offset cycle with the tool
used for setting the touch
sensor zero point
Executing automatic tool length

offset for other tools
Setting the tool change

position data
Executing automatic tool

breakage detection cycle
Tool not
broken
Checking for breakage

Tool broken
Pallet change, etc.
Zero point setting is necessary only when the

machine is installed.
(If higher gauging accuracy is required, however, you
are recommended to set the zero point occasionally.)
When tools in the magazine are replaced, it is necessary to set the new correspondence between the tool
pot numbers and the tool numbers.
Make sure that the tool length offset value is

"00.005 mm" or "PLI setting0.005mm".
Call the tool whose tool length offset data is to be

set from the magazine and mount it in the spindle,
then execute the automatic tool length offset cycle.
Repeat this operation for all tools that require tool
length offset data setting.
This step is not necessary for MC-H.
Usually, the tool breakage detection cycle is executed after each cutting operation with the relevant
tool is completed.
Tool length offset data must be set for tools that are
checked for breakage.
The function determines whether the machining is
continued as programmed or error processing is executed according to the result of the automatic tool
breakage detection cycle.
This step is not necessary if the setting that specifies
the machine should stop in the alarm stop state when
tool breakage is detected is made.
When the setting that specifies automatic selection of
a spare tool if tool breakage is detected is made, the
error processing on occurrence of tool breakage
should be as follows: the CNC judges that the workpiece machined using the broken tool is defective,
changes the pallet to a new one and starts machining
for a new workpiece.
EIOEMR5S1009R01
[Supplement]
With a double-column machining center that has a touch sensor at a location other than the crossrail (on the table, for example), the Z-axis zero point must be set after positioning the crossrail.
4297-E P-10
2-1.
Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
2-1-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)
Eeoemr5s1012
Set the Z-axis direction offset value of the touch sensor zero point using a reference
tool so that the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function operates correctly.
NOTICE
If Y-axis has to be retracted to set the touch sensor zero point, set the Y-axis retraction position
first by referring to [4. Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input VFST=, press the CYCLE START button.
Set an appropriate value for "" by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection cycle
may be selected.
The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
EIOEMR5S1010R01
For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window, refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS
ON/OFF Function Key].
2 Execute the sensor advance command M144 in the MDI mode. (In the case of a movable type
sensor)
3 Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the
Z-axis touch sensor.
There will inevitably be some slight displacement between the center of the sensor and the
center of the reference tool. This displacement, however, does not pose a problem for the succeeding operation.
4297-E P-11
[Supplement]
The reference tool means the tool used for setting the zero point in a work coordinate system.
4 At this position, execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.
CALL OO30 PAXI=7 PLI= (VFST=)
M02
[Supplement]
The settings for PLI should be as indicated below
Offset Type
PLl Setting
Relative offset type
Absolute offset type
Length from the spindle nose

face
Usually, the tool used for zero setting of the work coordinate system is also used for the sensor
zero point setting cycle. Therefore, there is no tool length difference between the tools used for
the two different zero point setting cycles, and the setting for PLI should be zero (PLI = 0).
For the absolute offset type, set the accurate length of the tool currently set in the spindle as
illustrated to the left.
If no value is set for PLI, either PLI = 150 mm. or PLI = 200 mm is assumed. Which of the
values is used is determined by the machine model.
PLI = 0
PLI
EIOEMR5S1011R01
[Supplement]
VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with
the Z-axis touch sensor, whereupon Z-axis zero offset is executed.
Zero offset of both the X and Y axes is executed so that the present (actual) position of the reference tool becomes X = 0, Y = 0.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-1-2. Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].
4297-E P-12
sensor)
6 Mount a small-diameter drill in the spindle.
7 Bring the drill tip manually near to the touch sensor and align the spindle center (drill center)
with the center of the touch sensor.
CALL OO30 PAXI=3
M02
X- and Y-axis zero offset is executed so that the present (actual) position of the drill becomes X
= 0, Y = 0. (The Z-axis does not move.)
After the execution of the X- and Y-axis zero offset, the Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the
travel end in the positive (+) direction and the sensor retracts, completing touch sensor zero
point setting.
The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 1.
The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 1 line
EIOEMR5S1012R01
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 1 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length
offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up window, refer to
[1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].
This completes the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting.
4297-E P-13
2-1-2. Reference Tool Movements during Z-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
Eeoemr5s1013
During the execution of the Z-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference
tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.
(2) The spindle is oriented.
(3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward.
(4) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate in the negative (-) direction until the reference tool
comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(5) The Z-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back.
2-1-3. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Y-axis)
Eeoemr5s1014
When the specifications for automatic tool length offset and automatic breakage
detection in the Yaxis direction (diameter direction) are selected, set the Y-axis touch sensor zero point retraction
position first by referring to [2-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input VFST=, and press the CYCLE START button.
Set an appropriate value for "" by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation]. In this setting, either the automatic tool length offset mode or the automatic tool breakage detection cycle
may be selected.
If an appropriate value is already set for VFST, it is not necessary to set the value here.
The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. For the procedure for opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window,
refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].
sensor)
3 Set the reference tool in the spindle, and manually bring the nose of the reference tool near the
Y-axis touch sensor.
Align the center of the reference tool with the center of the Y-axis touch sensor.
CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0(or accurate length of reference tool)

PY=Accurate radius of reference tool (VFST=**)
M02
EIOEMR5S1013R01
In actual programming, the three lines of program above are expressed in one line as indicated
below.
4297-E P-14
[Example]
CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0 PY=10 (VFST=1)

or accurate length of reference tool
Accurate radius of reference tool

EIOEMR5S1014R01
[Supplement]
1) When setting PLI, pay attention to the same point as explained in [2-1-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)].
2) Always set PY. If it is not set, PY = 0 is assumed.
3) VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
As the program above is executed, the reference tool automatically comes into contact with the
Y-axis touch sensor, whereupon Y-axis zero offset is executed. Zero offset of both the Z and X
axes is executed at the same time.
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [2-1-4. Reference Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].
The result is fed back to the offset data of system work coordinate system No. 4.
The set offset data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The offset data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns, respectively.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 4 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length offset
and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set nor referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up window, refer to [1-2-2.
MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].
This completes the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting.
2-1-4. Reference Tool Movements during Y-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
Eeoemr5s1015
During the execution of the Y-axis touch sensor zero point setting, the reference
tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(3) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back once and then moves forward.
(4) The Z-axis moves to the Y-axis touch sensor position (the position where the Z-axis was first
moved manually).
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the reference tool comes into contact with the
touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the reference tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the approach start position.
4297-E P-15
2-2.
Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table

Eeoemr5s1016
Set the correspondence between tool numbers and tool pot numbers in the tool
pot number - tool
number correspondence table.
The table setting shown below uses a machine with 10-tool capacity magazine as an example.
Assign a tool number

to each tool.
Magazine capacity: 10 tools

The total number of tools user for cutting
the various types of workpieces is 300.
Correspondence Table
Toolpot Number
Tool Number
20
30
31
32
105
270
10
271
Write the correspondence between the

tool number and the pot number on the
screen when tools in the magazine are
to be changed for new setup.
The memory of the OSP can hold the life
expectancy data of up to 300 tools.
Max. tool number:
Standard 50
Option 300
EIOEMR5S1015R01
The tool offset data obtained by the execution of an automatic tool length offset cycle is set for the
same offset number as the tool number of the tool presently being used (active tool).Similarly, the
tool offset number referred to and compared when the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
executed is the same offset number as the tool number of the active tool.
[Supplement]
To automatically change a tool for a spare tool, tools must be registered in a tool group.
For the procedure for registering tools in a group, refer to the Tool Management Function section of
the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
4297-E P-16
2-3.
Operation Mode Designation

Eeoemr5s1017
The basic operation mode of automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage
detection is
designated by the system variable VFST.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated
once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle is called.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
VFST
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1016R01
Bit No
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Setting
Description
Automatic tool breakage detection cycle
Automatic tool length offset cycle
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction.
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the execution of the automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direction.
To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set 0 for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch
sensor position.
Set 1 for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV in which the touch
sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4
Always set 0.
Bit 5
Always set 0.
Bit 6
Always set 0.
Designates the relative offset type.

The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point setting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.
Designates the absolute offset type.

The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the
tool length offset data.
Bit 7
4297-E P-17
An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.
Model
MC-H
MC-V
X-axis
Relative/
Absolute
Movement
Offset Type
Yes/No
Relative
offset
Absolute
offset
Yes
Yes
Z-axis/Y-axis Offset
Only Z-axis offset
Only Z-axis offset
Only Z-axis offset
Relative
offset
No
Only Y-axis offset
Y-axis offset after Zaxis offset
MCV
MCR
MCM
(Vertical
spindle)
Only Z-axis offset
Absolute
offset
No
Only Y-axis offset
Y-axis offset after Zaxis offset
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
VFST
Value
Automatic tool length offset
#01H
Automatic tool breakage

detection
#00H
#81H

detection
#80H
#09H

detection
#08H
#0BH

detection
#0AH
#0DH

detection
#0CH
#89H

detection
#88H
#8BH

detection
#8AH
#8DH

detection
#8CH
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM] for details of automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
for the horizontal tools of MCM horizontal.
4297-E P-18
2-4.
Automatic Tool Length Offset Function

The automatic tool length offset function automatically corrects the tool lengthEeoemr5s1018
according to the offset data set using the reference tool.
2-4-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Eeoemr5s1019
Automatic tool length offset in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated
below.
NOTICE
Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis touch sensor has been set before executing Z-axis
automatic tool length offset. Never execute Z-axis automatic tool length offset when the Z-axis
touch sensor zero point has not been set.
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for "" by referring to [2-3. Operation Mode Designation].
The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. Refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle.
When the tool is mounted in the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number displayed on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory random
specification) or the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) screen (for the ATC fixed
address specification) agrees with the tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle.
This operation is not necessary when the tool is mounted in the spindle by executing the M06
command, either in automatic or MDI operation.
3 Execute the following program after selecting the automatic mode.
CALL OO30 (VFST=) (PLI = Anticipated tool length)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Z-axis
touch sensor and the tool length offset data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory.
The set tool length offset data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/
CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen.
4297-E P-19
The obtained results are also displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen
EIOEMR5S1017R01
This ends the Z-axis automatic tool length offset processing.

[Supplement]
2) Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.
If no value is set for PLI, the value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 43 (distance
from the spindle gauge line) is automatically set as the anticipated tool length.
Machine operation
During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below.
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the touch
sensor.
For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [6-3.
Explanation of Variables].
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch
sensor.
(6) The Z-axis moves back several millimeters at a rapid feedrate.
(7) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor again.
The result of gauging is stored under the same tool length offset number as the tool number of
the active tool.
4297-E P-20
2-4-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Eeoemr5s1021
Automatic tool length offset in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner indicated
below.
NOTICE
1) Make sure that the zero point of the Z-axis and Y-axis touch sensors has been set before executing Y-axis automatic tool length offset. Never execute Y-axis automatic tool length offset
when the touch sensor zero point has not been set.
2) Before executing automatic tool length offset in the Y-axis direction, set the Z-axis tool length
offset data of the tools.
The Z-axis tool length offset data can be set either by executing the Z-axis automatic tool
length offset or by inputting an appropriate value at the TOOL DATA screen.
Procedure :
The set value can be confirmed by opening the VARIOUS DATA pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. Refer to [1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key].
2 Mount the tool for which Y-axis automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the spindle.
address specification) agrees with the tool number of spindle mounted tool.
command either in automatic or MDI operation.
CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius(VFST=)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the Y-axis
touch sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC
memory.
The set cutter radius compensation data can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH
OFFSET/CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The
obtained results are also displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
This ends the Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
[Supplement]
VFST may be set in this step instead of setting it first in the MDI mode.
4297-E P-21
Machine operation
During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool length offset, the tool moves as indicated below.
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis
touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis
touch sensor.
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate until the tool comes into contact with the Y-axis touch
sensor.
(6) The Y-axis comes to a stop when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
The result of gauging is stored under the same cutter radius compensation number as the tool
number of the active tool.
(7) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate.
2-4-3. Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset
Eeoemr5s1023
To execute automatic tool length offset on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously,
follow the procedure indicated below.
For points of caution and details of the tool length offset, refer to [2-4-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool
Length Offset] and [2-4-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Length Offset].
Procedure :
CALL OO30 PY= Anticipated cutter radius (PLI = Anticipated tool length) (VFST=)
M02
The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor then the Y-axis touch sensor.
This ends the continuous Z-axis and Y-axis automatic tool length offset processing.
4297-E P-22
2-5.
Setting the Tool Change Position (Other Than MC-H)

Eeoemr5s1024
When a tool is found to be broken in the automatic tool breakage detection cycle,
the broken tool
can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram.
In order to execute this automatic tool return cycle, the tool change position must be set for MC-V
and double-column machining centers since these types of machining centers do not have a preset
ATC home position like MC-H.
If the tool change position is not set for these types of machining centers, the tool change will be carried out just above the touch sensor. Since this may cause problems with some kinds of workpieces, it is necessary to set the tool change position for MC-V and double-column machining
centers.
Procedure :
1 Move the spindle to the desired tool change position.
Note that X- and Y-axis must be positioned at the desired tool change position. Positioning of
the Z-axis is not necessary.
CALL OO31
M02
The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed.
The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET
(VSZO[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The tool change position
data of the X-, Y- and Z-axis is displayed at the X, Y, and Z columns of the NO. 2 line.
This completes the tool change position setting.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 2 is used exclusively for the automatic tool length offset
and automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
4297-E P-23
2-6.
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
2-6-1. Z-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Eeoemr5s1025
Automatic tool breakage detection in the Z-axis direction is executed in the manner
indicated below.
NOTICE
Before executing Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the
touch sensor and the tool change position have been set.
Procedure :
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle.
CALL OO30 PLE1 PLE1= Tool breakage judgment value (PGO=)
M02
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the touch
sensor and the tool length is obtained.
The obtained tool length is compared to the tool length offset data stored in the CNC memory
and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set for PLE1.
The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool nose fails to contact the touch sensor during the
execution of the program.
This ends the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.
[Supplement]
2) To replace a broken tool with a spare tool, PGO must be designated.
For details of PGO, refer to item (11) PGO(P GO) in [6-3. How to Use Variables].
4297-E P-24
Machine operation
During the execution of the Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated
below.
(3) The X- and Y-axis move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Z-axis
touch sensor.
For tools whose nose is not at the center of the spindle, refer to items (6) PX and (7) PY in [6-3.
Explanation of Variables].
(4) The Z-axis moves at a fast approach feedrate until the tool nose reaches the position 20 mm
away from the touch sensor.
(5) The Z-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm past the point where the tool
nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.
If the tool has not been broken or the amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm:
The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Z-axis stops. The tool
length is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the
CNC memory temporarily.
If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm):
The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor.
4297-E P-25
2-6-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Eeoemr5s1027
Automatic tool breakage detection in the Y-axis direction is executed in the manner
indicated below.
NOTICE
Before executing Z-axis automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the
touch sensor has been set.
Procedure :
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection is to be executed in the spindle.
When the tool is mounted to the spindle manually, make sure that the active tool number displayed on the ATC TOOL DISPLAY (MEMORY RANDOM) screen (for the ATC memory random
CALL OO30 PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value PY=Anticipated cutter radius (VFST=)
M02
sensor and the cutter radius is obtained.
The obtained cutter radius is compared to the cutter radius compensation data stored in the
CNC memory and a tool breakage alarm occurs if the difference is greater than the value set
for PLEY.
The tool breakage alarm also occurs if the tool fails to contact the touch sensor during the execution of the program.
This ends the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection processing.
[Supplement]
2) To replace a broken tool with a spare tool, PGO must be designated.
4297-E P-26
Machine operation
During the execution of the Y-axis automatic tool breakage detection, the tool moves as indicated
below.
sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the center of the Y-axis touch
sensor.
(5) The Y-axis moves at an approach feedrate to the position 10 mm past the point where the tool
nose would be in contact with the touch sensor.
If the tool has not been broken or amount of chipping is smaller than 10 mm:
The tool nose comes into contact with the touch sensor and the Y-axis stops. The cutter
radius is calculated from the coordinate value of the contact position and is stored in the
CNC memory temporarily.
If the tool has been broken (amount of chipping is greater than 10 mm):
The tool nose will not contact the touch sensor.
(6) The Y-axis returns at a rapid feedrate.
2-6-3. Continuous Z-axis and Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Eeoemr5s1028
To execute automatic tool breakage detection on the Z-axis and the Y-axis continuously,
follow the
procedure indicated below.
For items carefully attended to and details of the tool length offset, refer to [2-6-1. Z-axis Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection] and [2-6-2. Y-axis Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MDI mode, input VFST= and press the CYCLE START button.
CALL OO30 (VFST=**) PY=Anticipated cutter radius

PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (Z-axis)
PLEY=Tool breakage judgment value (Y-axis)
M02
EIOEMR5S1018R01
3 The tool is first brought into contact with the Z-axis touch sensor to check tool breakage in the
Z-axis direction. When tool breakage is not detected in the Z-axis direction, tool breakage in
the Y-axis direction is checked.
4297-E P-27
2-6-4. Judgment of Tool Breakage
Eeoemr5s1029
When a spare tool is selected in response to the detection of tool breakage, operation
does not stop
even when the breakage is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge the occurrence of tool
breakage at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch the program execution in accordance with the result of the judgement.
It can be judged whether or not the tool is broken by reading system variable VOK1.
VOK1 = 0 Tool is not broken.
VOK1 0 Tool is broken.
VOK1 indicates the result of the previously executed automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
Another system variable VOK2 is also available for judgement.
VOK2 indicates the result of automatic tool breakage detection cycles executed after clearance
to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even once, the value set for VOK2 is VOK2 0.
VOK1 and VOK2 are not cleared to 0 when the CNC is reset.
[Supplement]
When tool breakage is detected by the automatic tool breakage detection function, the tool number
is registered by the tool management function as that of a broken tool.
In order to use the same tool number after taking the necessary measures, such as replacement
with a new tool, the registration of the broken tool number must be cleared.
Refer to Tool Management Function in special specifications of the Operation Manual for the procedure for resetting broken tool registration.
4297-E P-28
Cycle Time Reduction for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic

Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
By feeding a tool close to the sensor at a rapid feedrate, it is possible to reduceEeoemr5s1031
the cycle time of the
automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
Spindle nose face

Tool
2-7.
G0 (4)
G31F=PF1 (5)
G31F2000 (6)
Max.
tool
length
VLTL
Anticipatedtool
length
PL1
Safety distancePUDT
Sensor
Fig.1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function

EIOEMR5S1019R01
To use this function, it is necessary to set the following parameters.

Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3:
Default of maximum tool length for automatic tool length offset/tool breakage detection
With check mark: Valid
Without check mark: Invalid (Initial value)
Optional parameter (long ward) No. 44: Max. tool length
For this parameter, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be used.
Setting range: 0 to 999
Unit: mm
Initial setting: 0
CAUTION
Set an appropriate value for the maximum tool length setting parameter since 0 is set as
the initial value.
4297-E P-29
2-7-1. Automatic tool length offset cycle

Machine operation
Eeoemr5s1090
sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the point distanced from the touch sensor by safety distance (PUDT) + max. tool length (VLTL).
This operation is or is not executed according to the setting for the parameter.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF1, to the point distanced from the touch
sensor by anticipated tool length (PLI) + safety distance (PUDT).
If the PLI command is not specified, the Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate specified by PF1 to the
point distanced from the touch sensor by safety distance (PUDT). If the PF1 command is not
specified, the Z-axis moves at F2000.
(6) The Z-axis moves at F2000 to the point 10 mm beyond the anticipated contact point.
It stops when the tool comes into contact with the touch sensor.
(7) The Z-axis returns 5 mm from the contact point.
(8) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the point 10 mm beyond the contact
point.
(9) The tool length offset data is written to the active tool number or the offset number specified by
the PH command.
2-7-2. Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

Machine operation
Eeoemr5s1091
(1) The same operation as steps 1) to 4) of the automatic tool length offset cycle explained above is
executed.
(2) The Z-axis moves at skip feedrate F4000 to the point 5 mm away the anticipated contact point.
(3) The Z-axis moves at skip feedrate F1000 to the point 10 mm beyond the anticipated contact
point.
4297-E P-30
2-8.
New Cycle Time Reduction Function for Automatic Tool Length

Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
Eeoemr5s1032
By reducing the execution time of the cycle steps that can be reduced in the previous
automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the cycle time reduction function is made
more powerful.
This new cycle time reduction function is usable only in the vertical tool direction.
2-8-1. Command Format and Variables of the New Cycle Time Reduction Function
Eeoemr5s1033
The command format and the variables used by the new cycle time reduction function
are described
below.
Command format
The following is an example command to use the cycle time reduction function.
CALL OO30 PZRC=1 PSFT=10 POVT=20 PF1=5000 PF2=2000 M02
Variables
PZRC
Used to select the new or conventional cycle time reduction function.

1 selects the new cycle time reduction function and 0 selects the conventional
cycle time reduction function. The default is 0.
PUDT:
Undertravel distance (safety distance)

This defines the point where, during the approach of a cutting tool to the touch
sensor, the approach speed is changed from high-speed to low-speed. The distance from the touch sensor to the tool nose is designated.
For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is 5 mm.
POVT:
Overtravel distance (sensor breakage prevention distance)

Default is 10 mm.
PFA:
Approach speed to undertravel point

For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F4000 mm/min.
PF2:
Approach speed to overtravel point

For the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the default is F1000 mm/min.
VMSBU:
Setting for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36

If the setting for bit 3 of this parameter is 1, with 0 set for PZRC, the conventional cycle time reduction function is selected.
VLTL:
Maximum tool length

The value set for CNC optional parameter (long word) No. 44
PSFT:
Feedrate shift distance

This defines the point where, during approach of a cutting tool to the touch sensor,
the approach speed is changed from a rapid feedrate to high-speed (low-speed if
PSFT is not specified). The distance from the touch sensor to the tool nose is
designated.
The default is 5 mm.
4297-E P-31
2-8-2. Tool Movements of New Cycle Time Reduction Function

During the execution of the new cycle time reduction function, the tool movesEeoemr5s1034
as indicated below.
Note that tool movements differ according to the setting of the variables.
Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0
Machine operation
(1) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the travel end in the positive (+) direction
(3) The Y-axis and the X-axis, in this order, move at a rapid feedrate to align the tool nose with the
center of the touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch
sensor zero point.
The Z-axis stops when the tool comes into contact with the sensor.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch
sensor zero point.
2)
Touch sensor PF2 5)

zero point
Rapid feed 6)
PFA 4)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 3)
PUDT
POVT
EIOEMR5S1020R01
4297-E P-32
Variable setting: PZRC = 0, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 1
Machine operation
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the spindle nose face reaches the point VLTL
above the touch sensor zero point.
(5) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PFA, to the position PUDT above the touch
sensor zero point.
(6) The Z-axis moves at a skip feedrate, specified by PF2, to the position POVT below the touch
sensor zero point.
2)
PF2 6)
Rapid feed 7)
Rapid feed 4)
PFA 5)
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 3)
VLTL
PUDT
POVT
EIOEMR5S1021R01
4297-E P-33
Variable setting: PZRC = 1, Bit 3 of VMSBU = 0 or 1
If PUDT > PSFT, an alarm (Alarm B 2305 UNTENDED: gauging impossible 64) occurs.
Machine operation
(1) If the tool nose is below the point touch sensor zero point + PSFT, the Z-axis moves up at a
rapid feedrate to the point touch sensor zero point + PSFT
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate to the point touch sensor zero point + PSFT.
(5) The Z-axis moves down at a skip feedrate PFA to the point touch sensor zero point + PUDT.
(6) The Z-axis moves down at a skip feedrate PF2 to the point touch sensor zero point - POVT.
(7) The Z-axis moves up at rapid feedrate to the point touch sensor zero point + PSFT.
Rapid feed 1)
Rapid feed 3)
2)
Rapid feed 4)
2)
PFA 5)
PF2 6)
Rapid feed 7)
PSFT
PUDT
POVT
EIOEMR5S1022R01
4297-E P-34
3.
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Function for Special Tools and Attachments
Eeoemr5s1035
This section deals with the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection function
for special tools and attachments. If no such tools or attachments are used, this section may be
skipped.
3-1.
Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM
Eeoemr5s1036
The operation procedure for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection function for horizontal tools of MCM is described below.
NOTICE
Since the machine operations for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function used for horizontal tools of MCM are similar to those for vertical tools of MCM, part of
the explanation is omitted.
For the information not given below, refer to [2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection Operation].
Machine operation
During the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for
the horizontal tool of MCM, the tool moves as indicated below.
(2) M76 and M19 are executed.
The swivel head is indexed to the right position and the spindle is oriented.
(3) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to a position just before the touch sensor.
(4) The Z-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the touch sensor position for the horizontal tool.
(5) From here on, the movements are the same as for a vertical tool.
Note, however, that with an MCM horizontal tool, the Z-axis movements of a vertical tool are
replaced by the Y-axis movements of a horizontal tool.
3)
2)
1)
4)
5)
EIOEMR5S1023R01
4297-E P-35
3-1-1. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position
Eeoemr5s1038
When executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
cycle for an MCM
horizontal tool, the spindle may strike the workpiece during Z-axis downward operation.
To avoid such a problem, it is necessary to set the Z-axis lower limit position as close to the touch
sensor as possible, but at a position where the spindle or other machine unit will not collide with the
touch sensor unit.
Set the Z-axis lower limit position in the manner indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set.
In this operation, the X- and Z-axis may be at any position.
CALL OO32
M02
When this program is executed, axes do not move.
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position.
The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The Z-axis lower limit coordinate value is displayed
at the Y column of the NO. 9 line.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 9 is used exclusively for automatic tool length offset and
automatic tool breakage detection functions, it cannot normally be set or referenced.
4297-E P-36
3-1-2. Designating the Operation Mode
Eeoemr5s1039
As with a vertical tool, the basic operation mode for a horizontal tool is set using
system variable
VFST.
The setting for system variable VFST is the same as that for a vertical spindle with the exception that
1 is set for bit 6.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance
VFST
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1024R01
Bit No.
Setting
Description
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction
Bit 2
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis (radial) direction after the execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the Yaxis (tool length) direction.
To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection cycle only in the Y-axis (tool length) direction, set 0 for both
Bit 1 and Bit 2
Bit 3
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a tool to the touch sensor
position.
Bit 4
Always set 0
Bit 5
Always set 0.
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a vertical tool.
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a horizontal tool.

The tool length in reference to the reference tool used for zero point setting of a work coordinate system is used as the tool length offset data.

The length of the tool from the spindle nose surface is regarded as the
tool length offset data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
4297-E P-37
An example of VFST settings is given in the following table.
Model
Relative/
Absolute
Offset Type
X-axis
Movement
Yes/No
Offset in Tool Length

Direction/Tool Radial
Direction
Offset only in the tool
length direction
Relative
offset
No

radial direction
Automatic Tool Length OffVFST

set/Automatic Tool BreakValue
age Detection
#49H

detection
#48H
Automatic tool length offset #4BH

detection
#4AH
Automatic tool length offset #4DH

Offset in the tool
length direction then
#4CH
the tool radial direction
detection
MCM
Horizontal tool

length direction
Absolute
offset
No

radial direction
Automatic tool length offset #C9H

detection
#C8H
Automatic tool length offset #CBH

detection
#CAH
Automatic tool length offset #CDH

Offset in the tool
length direction then
#CCH
the tool radial direction
detection
4297-E P-38
3-1-3. Setting the Zero Point of Horizontal Tool Touch Sensor
Eeoemr5s1040
Set the zero point of the touch sensor for MCM horizontal tools in the manner indicated
below.
Procedure :
1 Select the MDI mode and execute M144 to move the reference tool near the horizontal tool
touch sensor.
Since the procedure up to this step is the same as used for a vertical tool, refer to [2-1. Setting
the Touch Sensor Zero Point] for details.
Setting the zero point for the tool length (Y-axis) direction touch sensor
CALL OO30 PAXI=#27H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=)
M02
Setting the zero point for the tool radius (Z-axis) direction touch sensor
CALL OO30 PAXI=#47H PLI=0 (or accurate reference tool length) (VFST=**)
PZ=Accurate radius of the reference tool
M02
EIOEMR5S1025R01
The result of gauging is stored in the system work coordinate system No. 7 (zero point of
the tool length direction (Y-axis direction) touch sensor) and the system work coordinate
system No. 8 (zero point of the tool radius direction (Z-axis direction) touch sensor).
The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
[Supplement]
Before setting the zero point, index the swivel head to the following position.
Vertical tool: Front position (M73)
Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)
4297-E P-39
3-1-4. Automatic Tool Length Offset for Horizontal Tools
Eeoemr5s1041
Automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools is executed in the manner indicated
below.
NOTICE
Before executing automatic tool length offset for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero point of
the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for "" by referring to [3-1-2. Designating the Operation Mode].
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset should be executed in the spindle.
In the tool length (Y-axis) direction
CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) (PLI=Anticipated tool length)
M02
In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius
M02
Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 (VFST=Appropriate value) PZ=Anticipated tool radius (PLI=Anticipated tool
length)
M02
sensor and the cutter radius compensation data is calculated and stored in the CNC memory.
The result of gauging can be checked by displaying the TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/CUTTER
RADIUS COMPENSATION screen of the TOOL DATA screen. The obtained results are also
displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4297-E P-40
3-1-5. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle for Horizontal Tools
Eeoemr5s1042
Automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools is executed in the manner
indicated below.
NOTICE
Before executing automatic tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, make sure that the zero
point of the horizontal tool touch sensor has been set.
Procedure :
Set an appropriate value for "" by referring to [3-1-2. Designating the Operation Mode].
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool breakage detection should be executed in the spindle.
In the tool length (Y-axis) direction
CALL OO30 PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
In the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value PZ=Anticipated tool radius
(VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
Both in the tool length (Y-axis) direction and the tool radius (Z-axis) direction
CALL OO30 PZ=Anticipated tool radius

PLE1=Tool breakage judgment value (tool length direction)
PLEZ=Tool breakage judgment value (tool radius direction)
(VFST=Appropriate value)
M02
EIOEMR5S1026R01
When the program is executed, the tool is automatically brought into contact with the
touch sensor, and the tool length is calculated.
The function compares the obtained tool length to the tool length offset data stored in the
CNC memory and judges the tool has been broken if the difference is greater than the
set tool breakage judgment value.
The result of gauging is displayed at the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
[Supplement]
Before executing tool length offset/tool breakage detection for horizontal tools, index the swivel
head to the following position.
Vertical tool: Front position (M73)
Horizontal tool: Right position (M76)
All other supplements are the same as in the case of vertical tools.
4297-E P-41
3-2.
Operation for Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection on B/C-axis Attachments, 90 Angular Attachments
and Extension Attachments (Option)
Eeoemr5s1043
This subsection describes the functions of automatic tool length offset/automatic
tool breakage
detection for tools mounted in a B/C-axis attachment, 90 angular attachment, or extension attachment.
(PAC = 90)
(PAC = 180)
(PAC = 0)
(PAC = 270)
Z+
Y+
X+
EIOEMR5S1027R01
Fig.1-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90 Angular Attachment
PAC = 90
PAC = 180
PAC = 0
PAC = 270
PAB
Z+
Y+
X+
EIOEMR5S1028R01
Fig.1-3 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B/C-axis Attachment
4297-E P-42
[Supplement]
1) To use an attachment, index the PAB to 0 or 90.
2) Call the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and set the data displayed there on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.
The correspondence between the items displayed on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
is indicated below.
ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB)

SWIVEL COMPENSATION
screen
ATTACHMENT SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen
Data for PAC = 0 PAB = 0
H* in the LOWER (G185) screen
H* in the FRONT (G181) screen
H* in the LEFT (G182) screen
H* in the REAR (G183) screen
H* in the RIGHT (G184) screen

EIOEMR5S1029R01
H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H8

If two B/C-axis attachments are used, set their data with separate compensation numbers.
4297-E P-43
3-2-1. Designating the Operation Mode
Eeoemr5s1044
Use system variable VFST to designate the basic operation modes for automatic
tool length offset
or automatic tool breakage detection.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated
once: it does not have to be set each time the MSB of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle is called.
VFST consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance
VFST
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1030R01
Bit No.
Setting
Description
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction.
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction after the execution of the automatic
tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle in the tool
length direction.
To execute automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle only in the tool length direction, set 0 for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Bit 3
sensor position.
Set 1 for Bit 3 for machine models such as MCV in which the touch sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4
Always set 0
Bit 5
Always set 0.
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a vertical tool or a tool in the extension attachment or the B/
C-axis attachment (PAB = 0).
Executes the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for a tool in the 90 attachment or the B/C-axis attachment
(PAB = 90).
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 6
Bit 7
4297-E P-44
3-2-2. Command Format
Eeoemr5s1045
The command format used for calling the automatic tool length offset/automatic
tool breakage
detection cycle for B/C-axis attachment, 90 attachment and extension attachment is indicated
below.
CALL(OO30 PAXI=*........) PAT=*
Conventional transfer variable
EIOEMR5S1031R01
PAT: Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)

[Supplement]
1) The installation angle of the 90 angular attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90)
must be set to 270.
2) The same sensor zero point is used for a vertical tool/extension attachment/90 attachment
(PAB = 0) and a 90 attachment/B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90). Set the sensor zero point so
that gauging cycles can be executed without causing trouble for any attachment.
3-2-3. Designating the Attachment

The type of attachment to be used is designated by the setting for VFST, PAXI Eeoemr5s1046
and PAT as indicated
below.
Bit 6 of VFST
PAXI
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
PAT
Command
Vertical spindle
0/1
None
Extension attachment
B/C-axis attachment
(PAB = 0)
0/1
1 to 7
90 attachment
B/C-axis attachment
(PAB = 90)
0/1
0/1
1 to 7
3-2-4. Movements of Tool in 90 Attachment/B/C-axis Attachment (PAB = 90)
Eeoemr5s1047
When a tool is mounted in the 90 attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB
= 90), the cycle is
executed in the same manner as for a tool mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM.
In this case, however, the Z-axis lower limit position is determined taking into account the attachment swivel compensation amount.
For details and supplemental information on the tool movements of a tool mounted in the 90 attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 90), refer to [3-1. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic
Tool Breakage Detection Function for Horizontal Tools of MCM].
3-2-5. Setting the Tool Change Position
Eeoemr5s1048
If breakage of a tool is detected (PGO = 2) after the execution of a tool breakage
detection cycle, the
axes move to the tool change position.
The tool change position must be determined so that positioning at the tool change position will not
cause interference between the tool and a workpiece with any type of attachment (vertical tool, 90
attachment, extension attachment, B/C-axis attachment (PAB = 0, 90)).
4297-E P-45
3-2-6. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position
Eeoemr5s1049
To set the Z-axis lower limit position, add transfer variable PAT to the usual setting
program.
CALL OO32 PAT=
PAT:Attachment swivel compensation number (Setting range: 1 to 7)
3-2-7. Setting the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data
Eeoemr5s1050
To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function,
the attachment
swivel compensation data must be correctly set.
Set the compensation data for the 90 attachment on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION
screen (G181 to G184) and the data for the extension attachment on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL
COMPENSATION screen (G185).
3-2-8. Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data
Eeoemr5s1051
Measure the attachment swivel compensation data for each type of attachment
and each attachment position by repeating the procedure indicated below and set the obtained data for the corresponding item (G181 to G185) on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen.
Procedure :
1 Mount the reference tool to the spindle where no attachment is mounted and fix a micro-indicator at the center of the table.
2 Manually move the X-, Y- and Z-axis to the position where the micro-indicator reads 0.
3 Select a desired zero point and set the zero offset data.
Set 0 for the actual position data and take this position as the reference for the following operation.
4 Change the spindle tool to an attachment (90 attachment or extension attachment) and mount
the reference to the attachment.
5 Carry out positioning so that the micro-indicator reads 0 and set the coordinate values at that
position.
90 attachment
Index the attachment to four positions, 0 (front), 90 (left), 180 (back) and 270 (rear),
and carry out positioning at the individual attachment index positions.
Since the extension attachment is installed at a fixed angle, carry out positioning at the
preset angle.
6 Set the compensation data by displaying the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION
screen.
Set the coordinate values obtained in the operation in step 5) above on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen (G185).
90 attachment
Calculate the compensation data for each index angle (PAC = 0, 90, 180, 270) based on
the coordinate values obtained in step 5) and set the calculated compensation data for
the corresponding setting item on the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
(G181 to G184).
To calculate the compensation data at each attachment index angle, refer to [3-2-9. Calculating the Compensation Data for a 90 Attachment].
4297-E P-46
The correspondence between the PAC angle and setting items is indicated below.
PAC = 0: G181 (front) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 90: G182 (left) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 180: G183 (rear) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
PAC = 270: G184 (right) at the ATTACHMENT SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
Reference
tool
X
Y
Z
EIOEMR5S1032R01
4297-E P-47
An example of attachment compensation numbers
G181
(Front)
G182
(Left)
G183
(Rear)
G184
(Right)
G185
(Down)
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
H1
T302
(attachment cover)
T303
(extension attachment)
H3
T301
(extension attachment)
H1
T302
(universal attachment)
T303
(special 90 attachment)
H4
H4
H4
H4
T305 (blank)
T306
(attachment cover)
(2 stations)
T301
(90 attachment)
T302
(attachment cover)
(3 stations)
T301
(90 attachment)
(6 stations)
T304
(90 attachment)
4297-E P-48
3-2-9. Calculating the Compensation Data for a 90 Attachment
Eeoemr5s1052
When a 90 attachment is used, it is necessary to find the attachment swivel
compensation data
using the coordinate values obtained in step 5) of [3-2-8. Measuring the Attachment Swivel Compensation Data].
The formula below are used to match the center of the vertical reference tool with the horizontal reference tool nose.
Vertical reference tool
Horizontal reference tool

EIOEMR5S1033R01
In the explanation below, D1 represents the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the vertical
spindle and D2 the diameter of the reference tool mounted in the horizontal spindle.
PAC = 0
X = X +
D1
2
D1
D2
Vertical reference
tool
Y = Y
Z = Z +
Z+
D2
2
X+
EIOEMR5S1034R01
PAC = 90
X = X
Y = Y +
Z = Z +
Z+
D1
2
Y+
Vertical reference
tool
D2
2

EIOEMR5S1035R01
PAC = 180
X = X +
D1
2
Y = Y
Z = Z +
X+
Z+
D2
2
EIOEMR5S1036R01
4297-E P-49
PAC = 270
X = X
Y = Y +
Z = Z +
D1
2
Z+
Y+
D2
2
EIOEMR5S1037R01
4297-E P-50
3-3.
Operation of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection with 30 Angular Attachments (Option)
(1) Automatic Tool Length Offset Function
Eeoemr5s1053
The automatic tool length offset function allows the measurement of tool length offset data for a
tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment.
Note that this function cannot be used to measure the cutter radius compensation data while a
tool is mounted in the 30 angular attachment.
(2) Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Function
The automatic tool breakage detection function allows detection of tool breakage or excessive
wear of a tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment. As with the automatic tool length offset
function, this automatic tool breakage function is unable check breakage of a tool in the radius
direction.
3-3-1. Operation Flow of Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Detection Function
Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in theEeoemr5s1056
vertical spindle
Measuring the tool length offset value of the reference tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment
Setting the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20])
Setting the Z-axis lower limit position data
Setting the zero point of the 30 angular attachment touch sensor
Measuring the tool length offset data for a tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment
.
.
.
Check the breakage of a tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment
.
.
.
4297-E P-51
3-3-2. Relative Offset Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])
Eeoemr5s1057
To use the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection function
with an angular
attachment other than a 90 angular attachment(30, 45, 60), a special referent tool, called reference tool B, is used to measure the attachment compensation data. Differing from the conventionally used reference tool - called reference tool A - which has a cylindrical shape, reference tool B
has a ball-shaped nose.
When setting the touch sensor zero point, the sensor zero point in the vertical and horizontal directions is usually determined by the length of reference tool A, which is determined by the specification
code (Bit 7 of specification code No. 24).
When setting the angular attachment touch sensor zero point, however, reference tool B is used to
set the zero point. This means the accurate length of the reference tool must be known beforehand.
The value used to calculate the length of reference tool B based on the length of reference tool A is
called the relative offset data between reference tools.
If a value is set for PLI, explained in [3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point], setting the "relative
offset data between reference tools" is not necessary.
The relative offset data between reference tools can be obtained easily by following the procedure
indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Mount reference tool B in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing
it into contact with the reference block.
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be B.
2 Mount reference tool A in the vertical spindle and read the Z-axis coordinate value by bringing
it into contact with the reference block.
Assume the read Z-axis coordinate value to be A.
3 Calculate the relative offset data between reference tools using the following formula.
Relative offset data between reference tools = Length of reference tool B

(coordinate value B)
- Length of reference tool A
(coordinate value A)
EIOEMR5S1038R01
4297-E P-52
3-3-3. Designating the Operation Mode (VFST)
Eeoemr5s1058
Use system variable VFST to designate the basic operation modes for automatic
tool length offset
or automatic tool breakage detection operation for a 30 angular attachment.
VFST
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1039R01
Bit No.
Bit 0
Setting
0
Description
Bit 1
Always set 0.
Bit 2
Always set 0.
Moves the X-axis when positioning a reference tool at the touch sensor
position.
If this setting is made although the zero point of the touch sensor and the
X-axis has not been set, this will cause very dangerous situation since
positioning is made to the machine zero point in this case.
sensor position.
Bit 4
Always set 0.
Bit 5
Always set 0.
Bit 6
Always set 0.
Bit 3
Bit 7
NOTICE
Pay attention to the setting of system variable VFST since it is also used for the automatic tool
length offset/automatic tool breakage detection functions for a vertical tool, B/C-axis attachment,
extension attachment and 90 angular attachment.
Although the operation mode is backed up in the CNC memory, you are recommended to set the
mode for each execution of the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
functions since the setting is also used for other applications as described above.
4297-E P-53
3-3-4. Setting the Z-axis Lower Limit Position (OO32)
Eeoemr5s1059
When the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle
is executed, a tool
must be brought into contact with the touch sensor at the right angle. Therefore, the tool is positioned in the direction in which the touch sensor is at the right angle before executing these cycles
with the 30 angular attachment tool. The point where the tool is positioned is called the approach
start position.
The position where the Y-axis should be retracted to avoid interference with a workpiece before positioning to the approach start position is called the Z-axis lower limit position.
For details on the approach start position, refer to [3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point].
The Z-axis lower limit position is also used as the spindle retraction position for sensor unit advance/
retract operation for models such as MCR-B II in which the sensor unit can interfere with the spindle
during sensor unit advance/retract operation.
Note that the set Z-axis lower limit position is used for the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection function of the MCM horizontal tool and the B/C-axis attachment and 90 angular attachment. Therefore, if these specifications are used in combination, set the Z-axis lower limit
position with care.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the position where the Z-axis lower limit position is to be set.
In this operation, the Z- and X-axis may be at any position.
2 At this position, execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.
CALLOO32
When this program is executed, the axes do not move.
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Z-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Z-axis lower limit position.
The set value can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4297-E P-54
3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point
Eeoemr5s1060
Before executing the automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection
function using
the 30 angular attachment, it is necessary to set the zero point of the touch sensor.
Follow the procedure indicated below to set the touch sensor zero point.
Procedure :
1 Set the VFST (operation mode) in the MDI or automatic mode.
For this operation, only bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection) has significance. For
other bits 0 may be set.
2 Execute M144 (sensor unit advance) in the MDI or automatic mode.
Pay attention to the execution of M144 since the sensor unit may interfere with the spindle on
some models.
3 Mount reference tool B to the 30 angular attachment and orient the attachment.
4 Position the tool approximately 10 mm away from the touch sensor so that it will contact the
touch sensor at the right angle when it is moved in the tool length direction.
5 Select the MDI or automatic mode and execute the following program.
CALL OO34 PAXI=#07H
After the execution of the program above, the touch sensor zero point coordinate values (X, Y,
Z) are set using the designation for PAXI.
For details of PAXI designation, refer to [3-3-11. Variables].
Note the relative offset data between the reference tools (VSTOH[20]) is used since PLI is not
designated.
NOTICE
If PLI is designated, the value to be transferred differs depending on the tool length offset type
(VFST setting). For the absolute offset type, set the length of reference tool B from the gauge line
to PLI. In the case of the relative offset type, set the relative length of reference tool B in reference to reference tool A.
For details on the relative offset data between the reference tools, refer to [3-3-2. Relative Offset
Data between Reference Tools (VSTOH [20])].
How the reference tool moves during the execution of the program is explained in [3-3-6. Reference
Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting].
The result is fed back as the zero point data to system work coordinate system No. 13.
The set zero point data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up
window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4297-E P-55
3-3-6. Reference Tool Movements during Touch Sensor Zero Point Setting
Eeoemr5s1061
During the execution of the touch sensor zero point setting for a 30 angular attachment,
the reference tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation
(1) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y- and Z-axis).
The approach start point is calculated on a line extended from the 30 angular attachment touch
sensor in the tool length direction. The following two positions are calculated on the extended
line: the position where the Z-axis is at the travel limit in the positive direction and the position
where the Y-axis is at the lower end limit position of the Z-axis. Of these two positions, the position that is closer to the touch sensor is taken as the approach start point.
Since the sensor position has not been measured at the start of touch sensor zero point setting,
the position 10 mm ahead of the point where the tool was moved in step 4) of the operation
described in [3-3-5. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point] is regarded as the 30 angular attachment touch sensor position.
(3) The reference tool moves the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
(4) The sensor unit retracts.
(5) The sensor unit advances.
(6) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Y-axis).
(7) The reference tool is brought into contact with the sensor (Z- and Y-axis).
(8) The reference tool moves to the approach start point (Z- and Y-axis).
(9) The reference tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET 1)
(10) The sensor unit retracts. (If PRET 1)
This completes the setting of the touch sensor zero point.
4297-E P-56
3-3-7. Automatic Tool Length Offset Function

To measure the tool length of the tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment,Eeoemr5s1062
follow the procedure
indicated below.
NOTICE
Before executing automatic tool length offset, make sure that the zero point of the touch sensor
has been set.
Procedure :
For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits 0 may be set.
Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection)
Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid)
0 (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in
the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If 0 is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since
the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.
Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection)
Since the operation to be performed is automatic tool length offset, 1 should be set
here.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30 angular attachment and set the angular attachment direction.
If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is
unknown.
The obtained offset data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by
the PH parameter.
The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code command.
3 Execute the following program after selecting the MDI or automatic mode.
CALL OO34 (PLI=Anticipated tool length) (PH=Tool number)
When the program is executed, the tool length is measured.
The measured tool length data is set as the tool length offset data of the tool number transferred by PH. If no PH parameter is specified, the data is set as the tool length offset data of
the active tool number.
NOTICE
If an anticipated tool length is not set, the minimum tool length is used as the anticipated tool
length.
Therefore, the minimum tool length must be set beforehand for optional parameter (long word)
No. 43, as an absolute value in mm units.
If the setting for this parameter is inappropriate, the 30 angular attachment may interfere with the
sensor unit. Set a value 10 mm longer than the minimum measurable length (determined by the
machine specification) as the minimum tool length.
If the minimum measurable length is set as the minimum tool length, the 30 angular attachment
will strike the sensor unit if the tool fails to contact the sensor.
4297-E P-57
Machine operation
During the execution of automatic tool length offset for the tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below.
(1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.
If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed.
(3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
(5) The tool moves to the approach start point (Z-, Y-axis).
If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position
(Z-, Y-axis).
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis).
(8) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET 1)
3-3-8. Tool Change Position Setting Function
Eeoemr5s1064
When the automatic tool breakage detection cycle detects a tool has been broken,
the broken tool
can be automatically returned to the magazine by using a subprogram.
When a tool is returned to the magazine, it may interfere with a workpiece, depending on the shape
of the workpiece. To avoid this, it is necessary to retract the workpiece. The tool change position
setting function is used to set the tool change position for this purpose.
The spindle is moved to the tool change position by X- and Y-axis movements. Note that whether or
not the X-axis moves is determined by the setting for bit 3 of VFST. The X-axis moves only when 0
is set for this bit.
Procedure :
1 Move the spindle to the desired tool change position on the Y-axis.
If the setting that enables X-axis movements is made, move the X-axis also.
CALL OO31
The axes will not move at all even when a program is executed.
After the execution of the program, the actual position is set for system work coordinate system
No. 2 as the tool change position.
The set tool change position data can be checked by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET
(VSZO[N]) pop-up window on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
4297-E P-58
3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Eeoemr5s1065
Automatic tool breakage detection is executed in the manner indicated below for
the tool mounted in
the 30 angular attachment.
NOTICE
Before executing automatic tool breakage detection, make sure that the zero point of the touch
sensor has been set.
Procedure :
For this operation, only the following bits have significance. For other bits 0 may be set.
Bit 7 (incremental/absolute offset type selection)
Set the same value as set in the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
Bit 3 (X-axis positioning valid/invalid)
0 (X-axis positioning valid) may be set only when PAXI was used to set the zero point in
the touch sensor zero point setting operation.
If 0 is set although the X-axis zero point has not been set, it could be dangerous since
the X-axis is positioned to the machine zero point.
Bit 0 (automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage detection selection)
Since the operation to be performed is automatic tool length offset, 1 should be set
here.
2 Mount the tool for which automatic tool length offset is to be executed in the 30 angular attachment and set the angular attachment direction.
If the tool is mounted manually, the PH parameter must be specified since the tool number is
unknown.
The function compares the measured data to the tool length offset data of the tool offset number transferred by PH to judge breakage of the tool.
The PH parameter does not have to be designated if the tool is mounted using an M code command.
CALL OO34 (PLE1=Tool breakage judgement value)

(PLE2=Offset value update permissible amount)
(PGO=Processing at the occurrence of tool breakage)
EIOEMR5S1040R01
Tool breakage judgment value (PLE1)

If no value is set for PLE1, the judgment value is taken to be 0.1 mm.
The tool is judged to be broken if the absolute value of the difference between the preset
tool length and the measured tool length is larger than the judgment value set for PLE1.
Offset value update permissible amount (PLE2)
When a value is set for PLE2, the present tool length offset data is updated to the measured tool length assuming that the absolute value of the difference between the preset
tool length and the measured tool length is smaller than the judgment value set for PLE1
and larger than the offset value update permissible amount.
Processing on occurrence of tool breakage (PGO)
If a tool is detected to have been broken while no value is set for PGO, an alarm occurs
and the tool breakage detection cycle ends without returning the broken tool to the magazine.
4297-E P-59
If a value is set for PGO to select the processing on occurrence of tool breakage, the
specified processing is executed without generating an alarm when tool breakage is
detected.
PGO = 1: The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change
position.
PGO = 2: The tool is returned after positioning to the tool change position.
PGO = 3: The tool is not returned to the magazine.
Since no alarm occurs if a value is set for PGO, it is necessary to judge tool breakage in
a program.
For details on judgment of tool breakage in a program, refer to [3-3-10. Judgment for
Tool Breakage].
Machine Operation
During the execution of the automatic tool breakage detection for the tool mounted in the 30 angular attachment, the tool moves as indicated below.
(1) The Z-axis moves up 1 mm from the actual position or to the travel end in the positive (+) direction.
If positioning of the X-axis is valid, X-axis positioning is executed.
(3) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis).
If the maximum tool length designation is valid, it moves to the set maximum tool length position
(Z-, Y-axis).
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor (Z-, Y-axis).
(7) The tool is assessed for breakage.
(9) The tool retracts to the Z-axis lower limit position (Y-axis). (If PRET 1)
The processing after the detection of tool breakage depends on the setting for PGO.
PGO = 1:
The tool is returned to the magazine without movement to the tool change position.
PGO = 2:
The tool is returned after positioning of the X- and Y-axis to the tool change position.
4297-E P-60
3-3-10. Judgment for Tool Breakage

When a spare tool is selected on detection of tool breakage, the machine is notEeoemr5s1067
stopped by an alarm
even if the breakage of a tool is detected. Therefore, it is necessary to judge whether or not a tool is
broken at the end of the automatic tool breakage detection cycle and branch a part program according to the result of the judgment.
System variable VOK1
VOK1 = 1: The tool is not broken.
VOK1 0: The tool is broken.
System variable VOK1 stores the result of the tool breakage detection cycle executed immediately before its designation.
System variable VOK2
System variable VOK2 is also used for storing the result of the tool breakage detection cycle.
Differing from system variable VOK1, it indicates the occurrence of tool breakage in all detection cycles executed after it has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0). If tool breakage is detected even
once in these cycles, the value of VOK2 is not 0 (VOK2 0).
VOK1 and VOK2 are not reset by resetting the CNC.
[Supplement]
The tool number of the tool which has been judged to be broken in a tool breakage detection cycle
is registered as a broken tool by the tool management function.
To use the same tool number after replacing the broken tool with a new one, it is necessary to reset
the registered broken tool status.
For the procedure for resetting this status, refer to Tool Management Function in the special specifications of the Operation Manual.
4297-E P-61
3-3-11. Variables
Eeoemr5s1069
Variables used in the subroutines that execute automatic tool length offset/automatic
tool breakage
detection for the 30 angular attachment.
PH:
Tool offset number

Used to designate a tool offset number if a tool offset number different from the tool number of the active tool is used for automatic tool length offset/automatic tool breakage
detection.
PAXI:
One byte (8 bits) transfer variable used when the sensor zero point is set. Each bit has
the following meaning.
Bit 7
PAXI
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1041R01
Bit No.
Description
Bit 0
Sets the X-axis zero point.
Bit 1
Sets the Y-axis zero point.
Bit 2
Sets the Z-axis zero point.
Bit 3
Always set 0.
Bit 4
Always set 0.
Bit 5
Always set 0.
Bit 6
Always set 0.
Bit 7
Always set 0.
VFST:
Designates the operation mode. For details refer to [3-3-3. Designating the Operation
Mode (VFST)].
PLE1:
Designates the tool breakage judgment value. For details refer to [3-3-9. Automatic Tool
Breakage Detection].
PLE2:
Designates the offset value update permissible amount. For details, refer to [3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
PLI:
Designates the length of the reference tool when setting the touch sensor zero point.
Designates the anticipated tool length when measuring the tool length.
PRS:
This is an RS command for multi-point spindle orientation operation.
PRET:
Touch sensor retraction preventive command

This is a function to prevent touch sensor retraction at the end of the touch sensor zero
point setting, automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection.
PGO:
Designates the processing to be followed on detection of tool breakage. For details, refer
to [3-3-9. Automatic Tool Breakage Detection].
PX:
Designates the displacement in the X-axis direction during positioning to the sensor position.
4297-E P-62
4.
Y-axis Escape Position (MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A/VH-40)

During execution of automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation) orEeoemr5s1070
tool breakage detection on the vertical or horizontal spindle of MCM-B/MCR-B II/MCR-A, the tool may interfere with the
touch sensor unit cover.
With VH-40, execution of automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection may also cause
interference between the table and the touch sensor unit.
In order to prevent such interference, the Y-axis escape cycle should be executed after setting the Yaxis escape position.
4-1.
Setting the Y-axis Escape Position

Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Vertical Spindle
Eeoemr5s1071
Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle (includes VH-40) by following the procedure
indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position.
CALL OO33
M02
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 12 as the Y-axis escape position.
Setting the Y-axis Escape Position for the Horizontal Spindle
Set the Y-axis escape position for the vertical spindle by following the procedure indicated below.
Procedure :
1 Move the Y-axis to the desired Y-axis escape position.
ALL OO32
M02
After the execution of the program, the actual position of the Y-axis is stored in system work
coordinate system No. 9 as the Y-axis escape position.
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate systems No. 9 and No. 12 are used exclusively for automatic tool
length offset (cutter radius compensation) and automatic tool breakage detection functions, they
cannot normally be set or referenced.
4297-E P-63
CAUTION
Set the Y-axis escape position at a position where interference between the tool and the touch
sensor unit cover will not occur.
4-2.
Tool Movements during Automatic Tool Length Offset (Cutter

Radius Compensation)/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
During automatic tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic toolEeoemr5s1073
breakage detection,
the tool moves as indicated below.
Machine operation in the case of vertical machining center (including VH-40)

(2) The Y-axis moves at a rapid feedrate to the Y-axis escape position (the position set at system
work coordinate system No. 9).
(4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward.
* The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position.
sensor.
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle).
[Supplement]
With the VH-40, since the touch sensor zero point in the Y-axis direction is set at the same position
as the Y-axis escape position, only the X-axis moves in step 5).
Machine operation in the case of horizontal machining center

(4) If the movable type sensor is used, the sensor moves back* once and then moves forward.
* The sensor unit does not move back if it is already at the retract end position.
sensor.
(6) The tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor according to the selected cycle (automatic
tool length offset (cutter radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle).
4297-E P-64
5.
Interference Prevention Measures for MCV-A/MCV-A II

During Execution of the Automatic Tool Length Offset/
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
This function prevents interference between the touch sensor and the coolantEeoemr5s1075
trough, and between
the spindle tool and the chip cover, during the execution of the automatic tool length offset (cutter
radius compensation)/automatic tool breakage detection cycle for the MCV-A/MCV-A II.
To make this function valid, set 1 for CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 4.
5-1.
Touch Sensor Operation Interlock

Eeoemr5s1076
A notch is provided in the coolant trough and the touch sensor zero point is set
above the notch to
prevent interference of the coolant trough with the touch sensor.
Touch sensor advance is enabled only at the touch sensor zero point. If the M144 command (touch
sensor advance) is executed although the X-axis is not at the touch sensor zero point, the touch
sensor does not move and the following alarm occurs.
The touch sensor can be advanced only through the notched part.
2437 Alarm B Improper M code 5
The X-axis touch sensor zero point described here is the position set by touch sensor zero point setting in the Z-axis direction and means the X-axis coordinate value in the system work coordinate
system No. 1.
5-2.
Measures against Interference during Execution of the Automatic

Tool Length Offset/Tool Breakage Detection Cycle
Eeoemr5s1077
In order to avoid interference between the tool and the chip cover, the X-axis touch
sensor zero point
must be set at the center of the notch provided in the chip cover so that the tool crosses the chip
cover through that point.
5-2-1. Provisional Setting of the X-axis Touch Sensor Zero Point
Eeoemr5s1078
Since the M144 command (touch sensor advance) is invalid unless the X-axis is
located at the touch
sensor zero point, the provisional X-axis zero point must be set before setting the X-axis touch sensor zero point.
Note that this setting is not necessary when adjusting a touch sensor zero point that has already
been set.
Procedure :
1 Move the X-axis by manual operation to align the touch sensor with the center of the notch in
the coolant trough.
2 Select the MDI mode and execute VFST=.
For "" set an appropriate value by referring to [6-3. How to Use Variables]. Here, the operation mode may be either automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection.
3 Select the MDI mode and execute VSZOX[1]=VRCOX-VMOFX.
4 Execute M144.
[Supplement]
Set the touch sensor zero point in the Z direction by designating PAXI=7.
4297-E P-65
5-2-2. Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage Detection
Eeoemr5s1080
Before executing the automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle,
set 0 for bit 3 of
VFST to enable X-axis movement.
VFST setting for the execution of the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection cycle
Relative offset
Automatic tool length offset: 1
Automatic tool breakage detection: 0
Absolute offset
Automatic tool length offset: #81H
Automatic tool breakage detection: #80H
This instruction manual specifies that the tool moves to the touch sensor position during the execution of an automatic tool length offset or tool breakage detection cycle in the following sequence:
Z-axis upper limit Y-axis touch sensor position X-axis touch sensor position.
In this order of tool movements, however, the tool will interfere with the chip cover.
The setting indicated above changes the order to:
Z-axis upper limit Z-axis touch sensor position Y-axis touch sensor position.
Similarly, if PGO = 2 is designated, the order of tool movements to the tool change position (the
position set by the execution of OO31), where the tool moves after the detection of tool breakage, is
changed to:
Z-axis upper limit Y-axis tool change position X-axis tool change position.
4297-E P-66
6.
Variables Used in Subprograms

The basic command format of the automatic tool length offset function and the Eeoemr5s1081
automatic tool breakage detection function was explained in the previous subsections.
In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of these functions are described.
6-1.
Table of Subprograms and Variables

Subprogram
Name
Setting of Z-axis
touch sensor zero
point
OO30
Eeoemr5s1082
Variable
Variables for which a Numeriwhich Must
Variables for which a Numerical Value Should be Set as
not be
cal Value Must be Set
Needed
Used
PAXI:
=3
=4
=7
VFST:
PLI:
Setting of X- and Yaxis zero points
Setting of Z-axis
zero point
PRS:
Setting of X-, Y- and
Z-axis zero points
PRET:
Operation mode
=1
PH:
PD:
Setting of Y-axis
touch sensor zero
point
OO30
PAXI:
=#17H
VFST:
PLI:
PY:
Setting of tool
change position
(Not necessary
for MC-H)
OO31
None
PRS:
Z-axis zero points
Operation mode
Accurate tool length
of reference tool
used in setting the
zero point
Accurate cutter
radius of reference
tool used in setting
the zero point
PRET:
=1
PH:
PD:
None

of reference tool
used in setting the
zero point
Spindle orientation
angle
Sensor does not
retract.
Tool length offset
number
Cutter radius compensation number
None
Spindle orientation
angle
None
Sensor does not

retract.
Tool length offset
number
None
4297-E P-67
Subprogram
Name
Automatic tool
length offset
OO30
Variables for which a Numerical Value Must be Set

VFST:
PY:
Variable
cal Value Should be Set as
not be
Needed
Used
PLI:
Operation mode
Approximate disPX:
placement of tool
nose in the Y-axis
direction from the
center of the spindle
(i.e., cutter radius)
Always set when
executing Y-axis
automatic tool offset PY:
PFA:
PF1:
PF2:
PRS:
PRET:
=1
PH:
PD:
Anticipated tool
length
Approximate displacement of tool
nose in the X-axis
direction from the
center of the spindle+/- values are
possible.
nose in the Y-axis
direction from the
Feedrate for the
movement from the
sensor to undertravel
point, PUDT (safety
distance)
Skip feedrate for the
first contact detection cycle
second contact
detection cycle
Spindle orientation
angle
Sensor does not
retract.
Tool length offset
number
PAXI
4297-E P-68
Subprogram
Name
Automatic tool
breakage
detection
OO30

VFST:
PY:
Variable
not be
Needed
Used
PX:
Operation mode
Approximate displacement of the tool
nose in the Y-axis
direction from the
(i.e., cutter radius)
PY:
Always set when
executing Y-axis
automatic tool breakage detection
PLE1:
PLEY:
PLE2:
PGO:
PRS:
PRET:
=1
PH:
PD:
PFA:
PF1:
PF2:

nose in the X-axis
direction from the
+/- values are possible.
nose in the Y-axis
direction from the
+/- values are possible.
Z-axis direction tool
breakage judgment
value
Y-axis direction tool
breakage judgment
value
Offset value update
permissible amount
Processing on
occurrence of tool
breakage
Spindle orientation
angle
Sensor does not
retract.
Tool length offset
number
Feedrate for the
movement from the
sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT
(safety distance)
second contact
detection cycle
PAXI
4297-E P-69
6-2.
Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)

Subprogram
Name
Setting of tool
length direction
touch sensor zero
point
(Y-axis)
OO30
Eeoemr5s1083
Variable
Variables for which a NumeriVariables for which a Numeriwhich Must
cal Value Must be Set
not be
Needed
Used
PAXI:
=#23H
=#24H
=#27H
VFST:
PLI:
Setting of X- and Yaxis zero points
Setting of Z-axis
zero point
PRS:
Z-axis zero points
PRET:
Operation mode
=1
PH:
PD:
Setting of tool
radius direction
touch sensor zero
point
(Z-axis)
OO30
PAXI
=#47H
VFST:
PLI:
PZ:
Z-axis lower limit

setting
OO32
None
PRS:
Z-axis zero points
Operation mode
of reference tool
used in setting the
zero point
Accurate cutter
radius of reference
tool used in setting
the zero point
PRET:
=1
PH:
PD:
None

of reference tool
used in setting the
zero point
Spindle orientation
angle
None
Sensor does not

retract.
Tool length offset
number
Spindle orientation
angle
None
Sensor does not

retract.
Tool length offset
number
None
4297-E P-70
Subprogram
Name
Automatic tool
length offset
OO30

VFST:
PZ:
Variable
not be
Needed
Used
PLI:
Operation mode
Approximate disPX:
placement of tool
nose in the tool
radius direction (Zaxis direction)
Always set when
executing automatic PZ:
tool length offset in
the tool radius direction
PFA:
PF1:
PF2:
PRS:
PRET:
=1
PH:
PD:
Anticipated tool
length
nose in the X-axis
direction from the
nose in the Z-axis
direction from the
Feedrate for the
movement from the
(safety distance)
second contact
detection cycle
Spindle orientation
angle
Sensor does not
retract.
Tool length offset
number
PAXI
4297-E P-71
Subprogram
Name
Automatic tool
breakage
detection
OO30

VFST:
PZ:
Variable
not be
Needed
Used
PX:
Operation mode
nose in the tool
radius direction (ZPZ:
axis direction)
Always set when
executing automatic
tool length offset in
the tool radius direction
PLE1:
PLEZ:
PLE2:
PGO:
PRS:
PRET:
=1
PH:
PD:
PFA:
PF1:
PF2:

nose in the X-axis
direction from the
nose in the Z-axis
direction from the
Tool length direction
(Y-axis direction) tool
breakage judgment
value
Tool radius direction
(Z-axis direction) tool
breakage judgment
value
Offset value update
permissible amount
Processing on
occurrence of tool
breakage
Spindle orientation
angle
Sensor does not
retract.
Tool length offset
number
Feedrate for the
movement from the
(safety distance)
second contact
detection cycle
PAXI
4297-E P-72
6-3.
How to Use Variables

Eeoemr5s1084
The following describes how the variables given in the tables in [6-1. Table of Subprograms
and Variables] and [6-2. Table of Subprograms and Variables (MCM Horizontal Tools)] are used.
Note the numerical values must be in the units presently in use.
(1) VFST (V FIRST)
VFST sets the basic operation mode for automatic tool length offset and automatic tool
breakage detection cycles.
Since the system variable VFST is backed up in the CNC memory, it only has to be designated once: it does not have to be set each time OO30 is called.
The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection cycles can be executed even in the same part program. In this case, set 1 for bit 0 of VFST when executing
an automatic tool length offset cycle. To execute an automatic tool breakage detection
cycle, set 0 for bit 0 of VFST.
VFST
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1042R01
Bit No.
Setting
Description
Executes an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool

breakage detection cycle in the tool radius direction.

breakage detection cycle in the Y-axis direction after the
execution of an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle in the Z-axis direction.
To execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic tool
breakage detection cycle only in the Z-axis direction, set 0
for both Bit 1 and Bit 2.
Bit 3
Does not move the X-axis when positioning a reference tool

at the touch sensor position.
Set 1 for Bit 3 with machine models such as MCV, MCM
and MCR in which the touch sensor is installed independently of the X-axis movement.
Bit 4
Always set 0.
Bit 5
Always set 0.
Does not execute an automatic tool length offset/automatic

tool breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.

breakage detection cycle for MCM horizontal tools.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 6
Bit 7
4297-E P-73
(2) PLE1 (P LENGTH ERR 1)
This indicates the tool breakage judgement value and must be set as an absolute value.
A tool is judged to have been broken if:
PLE1 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) |
If PLE1 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm is automatically
set for PLE1 in the subprogram.
(3) PLE2 (P LENGTH ERR 2)
This indicates the permissible offset update value and must be set as an absolute value.
If tool breakage is not detected in a tool breakage detection cycle and the following condition
is satisfied, the tool length offset data is updated according to the measured tool length.
PLE2 < | (Preset tool length offset data) - (Measured tool length) | < PLE1
As the tool length offset data is updated each time the cycle is executed, it must be carefully
attended to in reference to the occurrence of tool breakage. When PLE2 is not set, the tool
length offset data is not updated.
(4) PLEY (P LENGTH ERROR Y-AXIS)
This indicates the tool breakage judgement value in the Y-axis direction and must be set as
an absolute value.
A tool is judged to have been broken if:
PLE1 < | (Preset cutter radius compensation data) - (Measured cutter radius) |
If PLE2 is not set when executing a tool breakage detection cycle, 0.1 mm is automatically
set for PLE1 in the subprogram.
(5) PAXI
This designates the axis for which the touch sensor zero point is set.
PAXI consists of one byte (8 bits) and each bit has the following significance.
PAXI
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
EIOEMR5S1043R01
4297-E P-74
Bit No.
Description
Bit 0
Sets the X-axis zero point.
Bit 1
Sets the Y-axis zero point.
Bit 2
Sets the Z-axis zero point.
Bit 3
Always set 0.
Bit 4
0: Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a vertical
tool.
1: Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a vertical
tool.
Bit 5
Sets the zero point of the tool length direction touch sensor for a horizontal
tool.
Bit 6
Sets the zero point of the tool radius direction touch sensor for a horizontal
tool.
Bit 7
Always set 0.
Setting value of PAXI

Sensor Direction
Axis Name
Vertical Tool
MCM Horizontal Tool
Length Direction Sensor
Radius Direction Sensor
Length Direction Sensor
Radius Direction Sensor
Setting of X- and Y-axis zero

points
(#13H)
#23H
(#43H)
Setting of Z-axis zero point
(#14H)
#24H
(#44H)
Setting of X-, Y- and Z-axis

zero points
#17H
#27H
#47H
(6) PX
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool
(spindle) in the X-axis direction. Designation of plus and minus values is possible. When PX
is not set, PX = 0 is automatically set in a subprogram.
When the X- and Y-axis move to the center of the touch sensor during automatic tool length
offset/automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the tool is positioned PX away from the center of the touch sensor so that the tool nose is aligned with the center of the touch sensor.
Since the touch sensor is installed close to the travel limit, pay attention to the setting of PX
in reference to the travel limit.
(7) PY
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle)
in the Y-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for PX.
When setting the Y-axis zero point, an accurate cutter radius (displacement of the tool nose in
the Y-axis direction) of the reference tool used for zero point setting must be set for PY.
4297-E P-75
(8) PZ
This indicates an approximate displacement of the tool nose from the center of the tool (spindle)
in the Z-axis direction. For other details, refer to the explanation for PX.
(9) PLI
When setting the touch sensor zero point
Set the reference tool length for PLI.
Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting in relation to
the length of the tool used for setting the zero point of the work coordinate system.
When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that PLI = 0.
Set the length of the reference tool used for touch sensor zero point setting from the tool
nose surface.
When no setting is made, it is automatically assumed that PLI = 150 mm or PLI = 200
mm. Which of the values is used is determined by the machine model.
When executing the automatic tool length offset cycle
Set the anticipated tool length for PLI.
Set the relative length of the tool in reference to the reference tool (200 mm or 150 mm).
This corresponds to dimension a (Tool length - Reference tool length) in the illustration
below.
Set the length of the tool between the spindle nose (gauge line) and the tool nose. This
corresponds to dimension b in the illustration below.
Reference tool
b
Spindle nose surface
EIOEMR5S1044R01
When the tool set in the spindle moves toward the touch sensor, it advances to an imaginary position 10 mm beyond the position where it would come into contact with the touch
sensor. If PLI is not set, the minimum tool length set for CNC optional parameter (long
word) No. 43 is taken as the tool length.
4297-E P-76
(10) PFA/PF1/PF2
These designate the approach or skip feedrate for tool movements toward the sensor.
PFA: Feedrate for the movement from the sensor to the undertravel point, PUDT (safety distance)
PF1: Skip feedrate for the first contact detection cycle
PF2: Skip feedrate for the second contact detection cycle
PFA without PLI
(anticipated tool length)
PFA with PLI

(anticipated tool length)
Override valid
When PFA command is not designated:

F=PF1 (automatic tool length offset)
F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)
When PFA command is designated:

F=PFA (automatic tool breakage detection)
Override valid
When PFA command is not designated:

F4000 (automatic tool breakage detection)
When PFA command is designated:

F=PFA
Skip feedrate for the first contact Override valid

detection cycle
When PF1 command is not designated:
F2000
Skip feedrate for the second

contact detection cycle
When PF1 command is designated:

F=PF1
Override invalid
When PF2 command is not designated:

F1000
When PF1 command is designated:

F=PF2
(11) PGO(P GO)

This determines the processing to be followed after the detection of tool breakage. Selection is
possible from alarm-stop and spare tool selection.
When PGO is not set:
When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
CNC stops in the alarm state after the completion of the automatic tool breakage detection
cycle.
When the setting is PGO = 1:
When a tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
broken tool is returned to the magazine after the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
completed. Then, the execution part program is continued.
With MC-V and double-column machining centers, the tool change cycle is executed at the
X, Y coordinate positions where the cycle has been executed; therefore, do not set PGO =
1 for these models.
4297-E P-77
This setting is not allowed for MC-H.
With MC-H, do not set PGO as 2.
If tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the X- and Yaxis move to the preset tool change position (Y-axis moves first and then the X-axis) after the
completion of the tool breakage detection cycle. Then, the broken tool is returned to the
magazine and the execution of the part program is continued.
The tool change position must be set beforehand by executing the tool change position setting cycle.
Even when tool breakage is detected during the automatic tool breakage detection cycle, the
part program is executed continuously after the automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
If the setting for PGO is 1, 2 or 3, regardless of whether or not the broken tool is
returned to the magazine, the CNC does not stop even if tool breakage is detected and a
part program continues to be executed after the completion of the tool breakage detection
cycle.
Therefore, it is necessary to judge if the tool is broken or not in a part program and follow the
necessary processing if a tool is found to have been broken.
The result of the tool breakage detection cycle is set for system variable VOK1.
VOK1 = 1: Tool has not been broken.
VOK1 1: Tool has been broken.
If a measurement impossible alarm occurs, whatever setting is made for PGO, the CNC is
alarm-stopped after the automatic tool breakage cycle is completed.
CAUTION
1) Setting PGO = 1 is not allowed with MC-V and double-column machining centers. This
setting can cause interference between the tool or the tool change arm and the workpiece if a tool change cycle starts after an automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
2) Setting PGO = 2 is not allowed for MC-H. This setting can cause interference between
the tool or the spindle and the workpiece in Y- or X-axis movement that follows an automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
4297-E P-78
(12) PRS (P RS)
When using a special tool, a boring bar for example, the tool bit can fail to contact the touch
sensor if the spindle is orient stopped at the preset position. In such cases, it is necessary to
index the spindle to the desired angular position. PRS is used to set the desired spindle index
angle for such cases.
Example:In the case of the tool shown below, set 270 for PRS to index the spindle to allow tool
bit to contact the touch sensor.
Tool
Y+
Y-
Sensor
EIOEMR5S1045R01
Execute CALL OO30 PRS = 270
Y+
Y-
EIOEMR5S1046R01
[Supplement]
Spindle orientation is automatically executed at the travel end of the Z-axis in the positive
direction.
(13) PRET (P RETRACT)
With the retract type touch sensor, the sensor retracts after the completion of a cycle. If 1 is
set for this variable, the cycle completes with the sensor at the advanced position.
(14) PH/PD
Offset data (tool length offset data, cutter radius compensation data) are usually set and referenced for the offset number identical to the actual tool number. By setting PH and/or PD,
the offset data can be set for the desired offset number.
PH: Tool length offset number (default: actual tool number)
PD: Cutter radius compensation number (default: PH number)
Setting range: 1 to The number of tool data sets
[Supplement]
Even when only cutter radius compensation is executed, it is necessary to set both PH and PD
since the tool length offset data is also referenced.
4297-E P-79
(15) VLTL (Maximum tool length)
The maximum tool length VLTL, used for the automatic tool offset and automatic tool breakage
detection cycles, is added to the system parameters. The operational step 4) in Fig. 1-1 Cycle
Time Reduction Function on page 28 becomes valid according to the setting for this parameter:
Optional parameter (bit) No. 36, bit 3
1: Valid
0: Invalid (initial setting)
Optional parameter (long ward) No. 44: Max. tool length data
For the maximum tool length, set the maximum tool length among the tools that will be used.
Setting range: 0 to 999
Unit: mm
Initial setting: 0 (may be changed)
CAUTION
Because the initial setting for the maximum tool length is 0, an appropriate value must be
set for VLTL.
(16) PUDT (Undertravel distance (Safety clearance))
When a tool is moved towards the sensor, its feedrate is switched from a high speed to a low
speed. The position where the feedrate is switched is set for this variable in terms of the distance from the sensor to the tool nose. See Fig. 1-1 Cycle Time Reduction Function on
page 28.
Designate this variable when calling the subprogram.
If PUDT is not set, the following value is regarded as the undertravel distance.
Both PLI and PFA are designated: 50 mm
Either PLI or PFA is not designated: 10 mm
Undertravel distance: 5 mm
(17) POVT (Overtravel distance (Sensor damaging prevention distance))
This is provided to prevent breakage of the sensor if the sensor fails to function when the tool
contacts it.
Set the distance from the assumed sensor contact position to the position where axis feed
should stop if the sensor fails to operate.
Designate this variable when calling the subprogram. If POVT is not set, 10 mm is automatically set for it.
4297-E P-80
7.
Cautions on Operation
(1) Because the sensor will not work properly if its zero point is not set, be sure
to set the sensor
Eeoemr5s1085
zero point by executing the sensor zero point setting cycle when the machine is installed. For
MCM, the zero point setting cycle must be executed for the horizontal spindle touch sensor.
The sensor zero point is set for system work coordinate system No. 1 (Z-axis sensor) and
system work coordinate system No. 4 (Y-axis sensor).
System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 are exclusive to automating specifications
and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.
System work coordinate systems No. 1 and No. 4 can only be checked by displaying the
MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up window in the GAUGING RESULT display screen.
(2) When setting PGO = 2 with MC-V or a double-column machining center, make sure that the
tool change position setting cycle has been executed.
The tool change position for the automatic tool breakage detection cycle is set for system work
coordinate system No. 2. System work coordinate system No. 2 is exclusive to automating
specifications and can neither be set by parameter setting nor referenced.
(3) An emergency stop limit switch is built into the system to protect the touch sensors. This limit
switch stops axis movement if a sensor is pushed in too far.
If this happens, the emergency stop limit indicating lamp in the control panel lights up. To
release the emergency stop condition, select the manual mode, set the emergency stop limit
release switch to valid, and retract the sensor by moving the axis with the pulse handle in the
direction in which the limit switch is released.
(4) Do not call out the automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram
while there is a remaining shift amount in manual interruption operation or while the machine is
still in the mirror image mode. If a subprogram call is attempted, a measuring impossible
alarm occurs.
(5) As the automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions are used in
combination with the tool management function, the operator must become fully acquainted
with the tool management function by reading its manual thoroughly before using these functions.
(6) The explanations in this manual relate to tools that have the cutting nose at the front edge, such
as drills, taps and reamers. For tools whose cutting edge is off the center of the spindle, like
boring bars, variables PRS and PX or PY must be set in accordance with the tool nose offset
direction.
(7) The automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection functions cannot be
used for tools whose tool holder comes into contact with the touch sensor or touch sensor unit
before the tool nose does.
(8) Numerical values must be assigned to subprograms in the presently used unit system.
Note that the real number unit system must not be used.
(9) The cutter radius compensation mode and the local coordinate system are cancelled when an
automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram is executed and,
once cancelled, they are not restored after the completion of the subprogram.
(10) Call automatic tool length offset and automatic tool breakage detection subprograms in a work
coordinate system. An alarm occurs if a subprogram is called in the machine coordinate system. Note that a work coordinate system cannot be altered during the execution of an automatic
tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection subprogram.
(11) Do not use the user area as the area for storing programs, work coordinate systems, tool offset
data and common variables, automatic tool length offset or automatic tool breakage detection
subprograms.
4297-E P-81
(12) The allowable number of nesting levels of subroutines in an automatic tool length offset or tool
breakage detection subprogram is two. This means that the maximum allowable nesting level is
six when these functions are executed.
(13) Manual advance/retraction operation of the tool breakage detection unit (touch sensor)
With MCM and MCR, the touch sensor can be manually moved forwards and backwards.
a) Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to ON to enable independent manual operation.
b) Set the selector switch to FORWARDS.
c) Press the CYCLE START button.
The cover will open and the touch sensor will move forward when the CYCLE START button
is released.
d) Set the selector switch to BACKWARDS.
e) Press the CYCLE START button.
The touch sensor will move backward and the cover will close when the CYCLE START button is released.
f) Set the CNC operation panel mode selecting key-lock type switch to OFF to disable independent manual operation.
(14) An alarm usually occurs if the actual tool number is 0 when a tool length offset or cutter radius
compensation cycle is executed. Therefore, you are recommended to carry out a tool change in
the MDl or automatic mode in this case.
4297-E P-82
8.
Program Examples
8-1.
Automatic Tool Length Offset

Eeoemr5s1086
T2
T6
PY=30
Drill
Boring bar
EIOEMR5S1047R01
N1 T2
N2 M6
N3 T6
N4 CALL OO30VFST=1(PLI=40)(PF1=1000) .............Tool length offset cycle for T2
N5 M6 PLI ................................................................... Anticipated tool length (relative length)
in reference to the standard tool
N6 T5 PF1 ................................................................... First approach feedrate
N7 CALL OO30 PY=30................................................ Tool length offset cycle for T6
N8 M6 PY..................................................................... Tool nose offset amount from the
spindle center (Y direction) = 30 mm
:
:
EIOEMR5S1048R01
4297-E P-83
N1 T2
N2 M6
N3 T6
N4 CALL OO30 VFST=#81H (PLI=240) (PF1=1500) ...... Tool length offset cycle for T2
N5 M6 PL1 ........................................................................ Anticipated tool length
(absolute length)
N6 T5
N7 CALL OO30 PY=30 ......................................................Tool length offset cycle for T6
N8 M6
:
:
EIOEMR5S1049R01
Commands in ( ) may be omitted.

It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time a tool length offset cycle is called. As has been
explained, the touch sensor zero point must be set before the execution of an automatic tool length
offset cycle. For the setting of the touch sensor zero point, select the same offset type (relative or
absolute) as the type used for the automatic tool length offset cycle.
4297-E P-84
8-2.
Automatic Tool Breakage Detection

Alarm stop
Eeoemr5s1087
T3
PY=30
Boring bar
EIOEMR5S1050R01
N1 T1 ..............................T1: Drill
N2 M6
N3 T3 ..............................T3: Boring bar
N4 S300
N5 G81 G56 X40 Y20 Z-30 R3 F80 H1
:
:
:
N12 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.2)*1 (PLE2=0.05) .. Tool breakage detection cycle for T1
N13 M6
N14 T2 PLE1 ................................................................... Tool breakage judgment value
= 0.2 mm
N15 G0 X30 Y10 .............................................................. If no tool breakage judgment value is
set, "0.1 mm" is automatically set as
the tool breakage judgment value.
:
N29 CALL OO30 PY=30 (PLE1=0.1) ...............................Tool breakage detection cycle for T3
Off-center amount of tool nose:
30 mm
:
:
:
EIOEMR5S1051R01
Commands in (
) may be omitted.
4297-E P-85
When the tool is judged broken, i.e., when the measured tool length is smaller than the set tool
breakage judgment value, the operation stops in an alarm state on completion of the cycle (Z-axis
positioned at travel end in the positive direction).
*1: Tool length offset data is updated when variable PLE2 is set.
When the tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle is 0.051 mm to 0.2 mm
(the range set by PLE1 and PLE2) shorter than the initial tool length measured in the automatic tool length offset cycle, the tool length offset data is automatically updated based on the
tool length measured in the tool breakage detection cycle to compensate for the tool wear
amount.
When no PLE2 data is set, the tool length offset data is not updated.
Automatic spare tool selection (MC-H)
T1
T3
PY=30
Drill
Boring bar
EIOEMR5S1052R01
4297-E P-86
N1 T1 ..............................T1: Drill
N2 M6
N3 T3 ..............................T3: Boring bar
N4 G0 X40 Y10 S300
N5 G56 Z40 H1* M3
:
:
:
N18 CALL OO30 VFST=0 (PLE1=0.1) PGO=2 ...... Tool breakage detection cycle for T1 Tool
breakage judgment value
= 0.1 mm
N19 IF [VOK1 NE 0] N999 ..................................... Jump to N999 if tool is judged "broken"
VOK1: Judgment for tool breakage
N20 M6
N21 T9
N22 G0 X100 Y20
N23 G56 Z20 H3
:
:
N42 CALL OO30 PY=30 PGO=2 ........................... Tool breakage detection cycle for T3
N43 IF [VOK1 NE 0] N999 ...................................... Tool breakage judgment value
= 0.1 mm
Tool nose offset amount from the spindle
center = 30 mm
:
:
N999 M60 ............................................................... Pallet change command
Part program for the next workpiece ....................... If a broken tool is called in this program,
a spare tool is automatically selected
rom the same tool group.
At the same time as the spare tool is
selected, the tool offset data is rewritten to
the offset data of the selected spare tool.
The cutter radius compen sation data is
rewritten also.
EIOEMR5S1053R01
It is not necessary to set variable VFST every time an automatic tool breakage detection cycle is
called.
*: HA may be designated instead of H1. For details, refer to special specifications of the Operation
Manual.
4297-E P-87
9.
Alarm List
Name of Alarm
UNTENDED:
gauging impossible
(ALARM-B 2305)
Probable Cause
At the end of the gauging impossible
message, the cause code is displayed.
Refer to the Gauging Impossible Cause

Code List and eliminate the cause.
ALARM-B
2305 UNTENDED:
gauging impossible
Cause code
UNTENDED:
An attempt is made to execute the tool
no subprogram function breakage detection cycle although the
(ALARM-B 2311)
corresponding specification is not supported.
UNTENDED:
tool breakage
(ALARM-B 2309)
Tool breakage is detected in the tool

Direct of subscript
(ALARM-B 2231)
Tool number is 0.
PH and/or PD setting is wrong.
UNTENDED:
command missing
(ALARM-B 2308)
Eeoemr5s1088
Measures
to Take
Check the VFST setting.
When a tool is changed manually, the

active tool number must be set.
The PAT command value is out of

the specifiable range (outside the
range 1 to 7).
Wrong PAC command
The PAT command is not designated although 1 is set for VFST,
bit 6.
Plus travel limit over

(ALARM-B 2268)
The value assigned to PLI is too large.
Do not set a value larger than the maximum measurable tool length for PLI.
For the allowable maximum length of the
tool to be measured, refer to your final
machine/control specifications.
The value set for the zero point of the

touch sensor is incorrect.
The touch sensor zero point has been
set in the relative offset type but measurement is executed in the absolute offset type, or the touch sensor zero point
has been set in the absolute offset type
but measurement is executed in the relative offset type.
Set the touch sensor zero point again.

Be sure to use the same offset type (relative/absolute) for the setting and measurement.
4297-E P-88
Name of Alarm
Probable Cause
Minus travel limit over

(ALARM-B 2269)
Measures to Take
The value set for CNC optional parame- Do not set a value smaller than the miniter (long word) No. 43 (measurable minimum measurable tool length for CNC
mum tool length) is too small.
optional parameter (long word) No. 43.
For the minimum allowable length of the
The value assigned to PLI is too small.
Do not specify a value smaller than the

minimum measurable tool length for PLI.
For the maximum allowable length of the
The touch sensor zero point has been

set in the relative offset type but measurement is executed in the absolute offset type, or the touch sensor zero point
has been set in the absolute offset type
but measurement is executed in the relative offset type.
Set the touch sensor zero point again.

Be sure to use the same offset type (relative/absolute) for the setting and measurement.
Gauging Impossible Cause Code List <Alarm B 2305>

Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Used Subprograms
A maker subprogram is called while

Call a maker subprogram after selectthe machine coordinate system (H0) is ing a work coordinate system (G15 H1,
selected.
for example).
OO10
OO30
OO50
The mirror image function is active.
Cancel the mirror image function first.
OO10
OO30
OO50
Manual shift amount (total) remains.
Cancel the manual shift amount (total)

to zero.
OO10
OO30
OO50
In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation

shift of a coordinate)
Cancel the G11 mode first.
OO10
In the G51 mode (graphics enlargement/reduction)
OO10
T number is zero (0), or no tool is set.
Specify a T number.
OO30
Specify the PTLN command.

7
Specified T number or PTLN command is larger than the maximum offset number.
Specify a T number or PTLN command within the allowable range.
The power to the probe is not on when Check the following:

the flash on cycle is attempted.
Is there any obstacle between the
receiver head and the probe?
OO30
OO15
Is the spindle index angle for the

probe correct?
Does the receiver head flash?
9
The offset amount of the positioning

point for cycle start from the touch sensor zero point is greater than PCHK
(only for Y and Z axes).
When positioning the Y and Z axes,

position them within the range of
PCHK from the touch sensor zero
point.
OO30
4297-E P-89
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Used Subprograms
The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating
on.
on the proximity switch.
OO10
Check the touch probe battery.

The result of the touch probe test is
NG.
The touch probe signal cannot be confirmed.
OO10
The touch probe contacts the workpiece while it is being fed at a rapid
approach feedrate (X-axis).
OO10
With the FM type touch probe, reception of signals is not correct.

Gauging cycle start point
PUDT setting
The touch probe fails to contact the

workpiece while it is being fed at a
middle approach feedrate (X-axis).
When using the FM type touch probe,

signal reception is not correct.

workpiece while it is being fed at the
final approach feedrate (X-axis).
Check if the touch probe has chatThe proximity switch is not turned on
although the touch probe is brought
tered.
into contact with a workpiece (X-axis).
10
approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
using the FM type touch probe, signal
reception is not correct.
Check the following:

middle approach feedrate (Y-axis).
OO10

POVT setting
11
OO10
OO10
OO10

PUDT setting
OO10

POVT setting
12

final approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
OO10
13
The proximity switch is not turned on

Check if the touch probe has chatalthough the touch probe is brought
tered.
OO10
14
approach feedrate (Z-axis). When

PUDT setting
OO10
4297-E P-90
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Used Subprograms

middle approach feedrate (Z-axis).
16

final approach feedrate (Z-axis).
17

tered.
into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).
OO10
18
The touch probe contacts the workCheck the following items:

piece during the approach to the exter Start point of the gauging cycle
nal diameter in the OD gauging cycle.
Assumed OD value
OO10
19
PLH is not designated.
Set tool length offset number for PLH.
1A
PDH is not designated.
Set the cutter radius compensation

number for PDH.
1B
In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items:

detected during the approach to the
Is start point of the C-axis gauging
gauging point.
cycle correct?
15
OO10

POVT setting
OO10
OO10
Is PDl value correct?

Is PGI value correct?
1C
Touch probe contact is not detected in

X-axis direction motion within the
range of PUDT and POVT. (contact
value error)
OO100
1D

Y-axis direction motion within the
value error)
OO100
1E

Z-axis direction motion within the
value error)
OO100
1F
In the touch sensor zero setting cycle

for the vertical spindle longitudinal
direction, the cutting tool fails to contact the sensor.
Check the start point of the cycle; is it

close to the touch sensor
(within 10 mm)?
OO30
20
In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it
for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor
the cutting tool fails to contact the sen- (within 10 mm)?
sor.
OO30
21

for horizontal spindle longitudinal
Check the start position of the cycle; is

it close to the touch sensor
(within 10 mm)?
OO30
4297-E P-91
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Used Subprograms
22

In the automatic tool length offset/
(within 10 mm)?
cycle for the horizontal spindle in the
radial direction, the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
OO30
23
When the axis moves 0.5 mm in the

positive direction from the contact
detect point, the probe contact signal
has already been on. (X direction)
OO100
24

has already been on. (Y direction)
25

has already been on. (Z direction)
26
When the axis returns 0.5 mm from the

contact position detected after
approach (X direction), the value is
taken as the coordinate value in the
workpiece gauging direction again.
27

approach (Y direction), the value is
28

approach (Z direction), the value is
29
Check if the anticipated tool length is

correct. (for tool length offset cycle)
cycle for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction, the cutting tools
fails to contact the sensor.
2B

longitudinal direction, the cutting tool
2C
Check the following items:
OO30
OO30
Is the anticipated tool length correct? (for tool length offset cycle)
Is the cutter radius offset data
set? (for tool breakage detection
cycle)

Is the anticipated cutter radius
cycle for the vertical spindle in the
correct? (for tool length offset
cycle)
contact the sensor.
cycle)
OO30
4297-E P-92
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
2D
In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PL1 is appropriate.

in the X-axis direction (with angular
attachment), the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
33
In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items:
cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the
Is the sensor zero point set corcontact signal is input, in a sequence
rectly?
in which the cutting bit should not con Is the cutting bit free of chips?
tact the sensor.
Is the sensor signal correct?
34
In the U-center zero setting cycle, no

contact signal is input.

Is PD value correct?
Is the sensor signal correctly input
to the CNC?
35
In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check the following items:

the cutting bit contacts the touch sen Is the command value correct?
sor while the Y-axis is being fed in a
sequence in which contact must not be
to the CNC?
detected.
36

the cutting bit fails to contact the touch
Is the U-axis command too large?
sensor.
to the CNC?
37
In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
the cutting bit fails to contact the touch input to the CNC.
sensor in the sequence in which the Uaxis adjusted amount is checked on
the Y-axis.
38

In the tool breakage detection cycle,
the cutting bit contacts the touch sen Is the sensor zero point set corsor while the Y-axis is being fed in a
rectly?
detected.
to the CNC?
Is the cutting bit free of chips?

39

In the tool wear compensation cycle,
sor in a sequence in which the Y-axis
Is the U-center bit free of chips?
positioning is executed to a point distanced from the current position by the
compensation amount.
to the CNC?
3A
Check if the sensor signal is correctly

sensor in a sequence in which the cutting bit radial position is corrected in
the U-axis adjusting cycle.
Used Subprograms
OO30
4297-E P-93
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Used Subprograms
3B

After the completion of U-axis compensation in the tool wear compensa- input to the CNC.
tion cycle, the cutting bit fails to contact
the touch sensor in the sequence in
which the adjusted amount is checked
in the Y-axis movement.
3C
Execute the gauging cycle after indexWhen the gauging cycle is executed
ing the swivel head to the M75 (rear)
with a touch probe set in the vertical
spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not position.
in the M75 (rear) position.
OO10
3D

for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel
head is not in the M73 (front) position,
or the horizontal spindle is being used.
Execute the cycle after indexing

the swivel head to the M73 (front)
position.
OO30

for the vertical spindle in the radial
direction on the MCM, the swivel head
is not in the M73 (front) position, or the
horizontal spindle is being used.

position.

for the horizontal spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel
head is not in the M76 (right) position,

the swivel head to the M76 (right)
position.

for the horizontal spindle in the radial
is not in the M76 (right) position, or the

position.
3E
3F
40
Check if the PAXI data is correct.

OO30
Check if the PAXI data is correct

OO30

OO30
41
Check if the T command is correct.

The tool number for the angular
attachment is T52 or T53. (For the
angular attachment tool, only T51 (90
angular attachment) can be used for
tool length offset).
42
The power supply for the optical type

touch probe cannot be turned on.
OO16
OO18
43

touch probe cannot be turned off.
OO17
OO19
4297-E P-94
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION
SECTION 2
1.
AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION
Overview
Eeoemr5s2001
The automatic gauging function automatically checks the dimensions of a workpiece
by executing a
subprogram. The touch probe with the same shank shape as the cutting tool is mounted in the spindle and brought into contact with the gauging face of the workpiece to read the coordinate values of
the contact point. The workpiece dimension is then automatically calculated using these coordinate
values.
The results of gauging are displayed on the screen. It is also possible to judge if the gauging result
is acceptable or not in a part program. A function to output the results of gauging to the printer is
provided as an option.
It is possible to set the zero offset of any work coordinate system based on the results of gauging.
The automatic gauging function is classified into the following two major function types.
Dimension check function
Automatic zero offset function (includes the dimension check function)
1-1.
Dimension Check Function

Eeoemr5s2002
The following four gauging patterns are provided for the dimension check function.
(1) Inner diameter (ID) gauging
This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece inner diameter.
The results can be evaluated.
(2) Outer diameter (OD) gauging
This function automatically measures the center position and the workpiece outer diameter.
(3) End face gauging
This function automatically measures the end face position in any of the following directions: Xaxis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions.
(4) Calculation of the center and distance between two points
This function calculates the center and the distance between two points measured in any of the
three patterns (1) to (3) described above.
Since the results obtained from the gauging cycle (gauging results) are automatically compared
with the theoretical values (anticipated values) and the difference calculated to judge whether or
not the gauging result is acceptable, this function can be used for the following purposes.
Controlling the workpiece dimensions
Recognizing the workpiece type (or pallet table)
Confirming the zero point
1-2.
Automatic Zero Offset Function

The automatic zero offset function offsets the zero point so that the coordinate Eeoemr5s2003
values of the position
where the dimension check was executed will be the desired coordinate values.
In this way, zero offset is possible for any required work coordinate system.
4297-E P-95
2.
Operation of the Automatic Gauging Function

Eeoemr5s2004
The following flowchart shows the operating procedure of the automatic gauging
function.
Is the machine
model MCM?
No
Yes
No
Is the touch probe

mounted in the
vertical spindle?
Yes
Setting the zero point of the
datum hole
Execute these steps once a week to maintain the

accuracy of automatic gauging.
In addition to this compensation/offset at regular
intervals, you are recommended to execute these
procedures when a new touch probe is set in the
magazine.
Zero point setting of the datum hole is necessary
only when a touch probe is mounted in the vertical
spindle (horizontal spindle for MC-H).
Checking the ON/OFF state of

the touch probe
Executing the radius compensation for the touch probe
Executing the length offset for

the touch probe
Checking the workpiece

dimension
Automatic zero offset
Execute this function for controlling workpiece

dimensions, judging workpiece kinds or offsetting
the zero point automatically.
Execute this function to automatically offset the
zero point according to the results of the dimension
check function.
EIOEMR5S2001R01
[Supplement]
The explanation in this section assumes that the functions are executed in the automatic mode.
Therefore, the programs necessary in each step of the operation must be prepared. Use the program edit function to prepare these programs.
4297-E P-96
2-1.
Setting the Datum Hole Zero Point

Eeoemr5s2005
The datum hole zero point needs to be set only when mounting a touch probe in
the horizontal spindle (in the case of MC-H) or the vertical spindle (in the case of MC-V).
If a touch probe is mounted in the horizontal spindle of MCM, zero point setting must not be performed.
Procedure :
1 Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured 20 mm or larger
diameter hole in it.
2 Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool.
Use the pulse handle for this operation.
3 Set the zero point.
4 Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero
point, check the measured value again.
5 Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge and mount the
touch probe in the spindle.
6 Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters
the datum hole.
7 Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm from the datum
block upper face.
8 Select the MDI mode and execute the following program.
CALL OO21
M02
When this program is executed, the zero point is set so that the actual position of the touch
probe will be X=0, Y=0, Z=0 of system work coordinate system No. 3.
4297-E P-97
The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) popup window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen. The set X, Y and Z values are displayed at X,
Y and Z columns of the NO. 3 line.
EIOEMR5S2002R01
[Supplement]
Since system work coordinate system No. 3 is used exclusively for the automatic gauging function,
it cannot normally be set or referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key].
4297-E P-98
2-2.
Touch Probe Radius Compensation

Eeoemr5s2006
The following describes how the touch probe radius is corrected.
To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe radius compensation must be executed at least
once a week.
2-2-1. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation
Eeoemr5s2007
The general operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is described
below.
For touch probe radius compensation for the MCM horizontal spindle, refer to [2-2-2. Touch Probe
Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)].
CAUTION
If the radius compensation cycle for the touch probe is executed before setting the zero point of
the datum hole, the machine will operate unpredictably.
Execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle only after setting the datum hole zero point.
Procedure :
1 Execute the datum hole zero point setting cycle.
2 In the MDI mode, specify VNCOM[1] = 8 and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact
detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF.
The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL
POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.
3 Mount the touch probe in the spindle.
4 Select the automatic mode and execute the following program.
CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3
M02
The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system.
When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the
radius compensation cycle is executed.
The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.
Direction
System Variable
Radius Compensation
Data
X+
VSTOD [1]
X-
VSTOD [2]
Y+
VSTOD [3]
Y-
VSTOD [4]
Z+
Z-
VSTOD [5]
4297-E P-99
The set data can be checked by opening the MSB TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (VSTOH[N])/MSB
CUTR COMP. (VSTOD[N]) pop-up window, shown below.
EIOEMR5S2003R01
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1
[1-2-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].
After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius compensation number, proceed to the steps below.
5 Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute
the ID gauging cycle.
For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].
6 On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the measured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.
7 Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.
8 Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value,
sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these
three values are less than several micrometers.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively for the automatic gauging function, they cannot normally be set or referenced.
4297-E P-100
Machine operation
During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
Spindle orientation may be executed after the spindle has rotated a half turn to check the touch
probe signal.
For details, refer to [6-1. Checking Proximity Switch Operation].
(3) The X- and Y-axis move to the center of the datum hole at a rapid feedrate.
(4) The Z-axis moves down at a rapid feedrate until the touch probe ball reaches a point 30 mm
away from the datum hole.
(5) The Z-axis moves down 30 mm further at a rapid feedrate and the touch probe ball enters the
datum hole.
(6) Datum hole gauging cycle is executed in the following sequence: X+ direction, X- direction, Y+
direction and Y- direction.
2-2-2. Touch Probe Radius Compensation Operation (MCM Horizontal Spindle)

The operating procedure for touch probe radius compensation is describedEeoemr5s2009
below for the touch
probe mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle.
For general touch probe radius compensation, refer to [2-3. Touch Probe Length Offset].
Procedure :
1 Mount a datum hole block (master ring) that has an accurately measured 20 mm or larger
diameter hole in it.
2 Accurately align the datum hole center with the spindle center using sling gauge or similar tool.
Use the pulse handle for this operation.
3 Set the zero point.
To do this, select the zero point setting mode and enter the data using the keyboard.
4 Select the MDI mode and execute positioning to the zero point at a rapid feedrate. At the zero
point, check the measured value again.
5 Move only the Z-axis in the positive (+) direction to remove the sling gauge, and mount the
touch probe in the spindle.
At the POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE (FIXED ADDRESS) in the TOOL DATE SET screen mode,
set HORIZONTAL TOOL USED for ACTUAL TOOL NO.
6 Move the Z-axis in the negative (-) direction to the position where the touch probe ball enters
the datum hole.
7 Move the Z-axis so that the touch probe ball enters the datum hole 5 to 7 mm from the datum
block upper face.
4297-E P-101
8 In the MDI mode, specify VNCOM[1] = 8 and touch the probe by hand to check if the contact
detection signal is correctly turned ON and OFF.
The ON/OFF state of the contact detection signal can be checked by displaying the ACTUAL
POSITION screen or by observing the indicator lamps on the operation panel.
9 Mount the touch probe in the spindle.
CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI=(Datum hole diameter) POVT=3
M02
The command must be specified in the presently selected unit system.
When the program is executed, the touch probe automatically enters the datum hole and the
radius compensation cycle is executed.
[Supplement]
To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the direction of the touch probe, the touch probe
must be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode.
The results of the cycle are set for the tool radius compensation number indicated below.
Radius Compensation Data
Direction
System Variable
M73 (Front)
M74 (Left)
M75 (Rear)
M76 (Right)
X+
VSTOD [9]
VSTOH [3]
VSTOD [17]
X-
VSTOH [1]
VSTOD [10]
VSTOD [18]
Y+
VSTOD [7]
VSTOH [2]
VSTOD [15]
Y-
VSTOD [8]
VSTOD [16]
VSTOH [4]
Z+
VSTOD [5]
VSTOD [11]
VSTOD [13]
VSTOD [19]
Z-
VSTOD [6]
VSTOD [12]
VSTOD [14]
VSTOD [20]
EIOEMR5S2004R01
4297-E P-102
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [12-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].
After making sure that the touch probe radius compensation data is set for the tool radius compensation number, proceed to the steps below.
11 Using the hole where the touch probe radius compensation cycle has been executed, execute
the ID gauging cycle.
For the ID gauging cycle, refer to [2-4. Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function].
12 On the GAUGING RESULT display screen, compare the anticipated center value with the measured center value to confirm that the difference is less than several micrometers.
13 Remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge instead.
14 Turn the sling gauge at the measured center position and compare the measured center value,
sling gauge reading and anticipated center value. Make sure that differences among these
three values are less than several micrometers.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation for the touch probe mounted in
the MCM horizontal spindle.
[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively used for the
automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.
Machine operation
During the execution of the touch probe radius compensation cycle for the touch probe mounted in
the MCM horizontal spindle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
probe signal.
(2) The gauging cycle is executed for the datum hole in the sequence indicated below.
Touch Probe Direction
M73 (Front)
MCM
Horizontal
spindle
Gauging Order
1
Y+
Y-
Z+
Z-
M74 (Left)
X+
X-
Z+
Z-
M75 (Rear)
Y+
Y-
Z+
Z-
M76 (Right)
X+
X-
Z+
Z-
(3) The Z-axis moves to and stops at the center of the datum hole.
4297-E P-103
Touch Probe Length Offset

Eeoemr5s2011
The following describes how the touch probe length is offset.
To maintain high gauging accuracy, touch probe length offset must be executed at least once a
week.
Reference tool
2-3.
PLI (Approximate length offset data of the touch

probe in reference to the reference tool)
Workpiece
PEI (Coordinate value of the Z-axis

gauging face)
EIOEMR5S2005R01
The operating procedure for touch probe length offset is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the X-, Y- and Z-axis so that the touch probe comes to the end face where the gauging
cycle is to be executed.
For this positioning, use a part program (manual or MDI mode operation is also allowed).
The distance between the touch probe ball and the gauging face can be any desired distance.
CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI=(Z-coordinate value of gauging face)

PLI=(Approximate touch probe length offset data)
M02
EIOEMR5S2006R01
When the program is executed, the length offset data of the touch probe is automatically measured.
The offset data is calculated so that the result of the gauging cycle executed at the same gauging face will be the value set for PEI and set for system length offset number 5.
For MCM, the offset data is set for system length offset numbers 1 to 5 as indicated below
Direction
No.
Tool Length Offset No.
Vertical Tool
VSTOH [5]
MCM Horizontal Tool

M73 (Front)
M74 (Left)
M75 (Rear)
M76 (Right)
VSTOH [1]
VSTOH [2]
VSTOH [3]
VSTOH [4]
4297-E P-104
EIOEMR5S2007R01
This completes the touch probe length offset operation.

[Supplement]
Since cutter radius compensation numbers 1 to 20 for the system are used exclusively for the
automatic gauging function, then cannot normally be set or referenced.
For the procedure for opening the MSB TOOL ON/OFF pop-up window, refer to SECTION 1 [1-2-3.
MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key].
Machine operation
During the execution of the touch probe length offset cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
probe signal.
(2) The touch probe moves to the gauging face to measure the gauging face.
(3) The touch probe moves in the length direction and stops at the previous position.
The touch probe does not move in the radius direction for the execution of the touch probe
length offset cycle.
4297-E P-105
2-4.
Inner Diameter (ID) Gauging Function

Eeoemr5s2014
The ID gauging function automatically measures the center position and the diameter
of the target
hole.
This function can evaluate the result of gauging at the same time.
The ID gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball at the anticipated center position of the target hole using a part
program.
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=(Anticipated hole diameter)
M02
3 When this program is executed, the ID gauging cycle is automatically executed.
If a touch probe is mounted in the MCM horizontal spindle, the function automatically recognizes the touch probe direction and executes the ID gauging cycle accordingly.
[Supplement]
To allow the CNC to automatically recognize the touch probe direction, the touch probe must
be mounted in the spindle in the automatic or MDI mode.
The results of gauging are displayed on the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1.
Displaying the Result of Gauging].
EIOEMR5S2008R01
4297-E P-106
4 Retract the touch probe using a part program.
This completes the ID gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z50 H1
M130
G1 Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=200
G0 Z500
M02
R100
H1: Touch probe tool length offset data

EIOEMR5S2009R01
Machine operation
During the execution of the ID gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
probe signal.
(2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of
directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-.
For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated
below.The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging
cycle.
Vertical Spindle
MCM
Horizontal
spindle
Gauging Order
1
X+
X-
Y+
Y-
X+
X-
M73
(Front)
Y+
Y-
Z+
Z-
Y+
Y-
M74
(Left)
X+
X-
Z+
Z-
X+
X-
M75
(Rear)
Y+
Y-
Z+
Z-
Y+
Y-
M76
(Right)
X+
X-
Z+
Z-
X+
X-
(3) The touch probe stops at the center of the hole obtained as the result of the ID gauging cycle.
The touch probe lengthwise direction axis does not move during the execution of the ID gauging
cycle.
4297-E P-107
2-5.
Outer Diameter (OD) Gauging Function

The OD gauging function automatically measures the center position and theEeoemr5s2017
diameter of a workpiece.
The OD gauging procedure is described below.
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball to the anticipated center position of the target outer diameter
using a part program.
In this positioning, move the touch probe ball to a point approximately 10 mm away from the
gauging point.
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=(Anticipated outer diameter) *PIN=(Infeed direction feed distance)
M02
* PZIN may be used instead of PIN.
For argument PIN (PZIN), specify a relative value (a positive incremental value).
3 When the program is executed, the OD gauging cycle is automatically executed.
EIOEMR5S2010R01
4297-E P-108
R
10
0

This completes the OD gauging operation.
Example program
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z10 H1
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=200 PZIN=15
G0 Z500
M02
Touch probe
PIN(PZIN)
In this program, positioning of the Z-axis is
executed at a rapid feedrate.
EIOEMR5S2011R01
4297-E P-109
Machine operation
During the execution of the OD gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated below.
Touch probe
a
b
PIN(PZIN)
Workpiece OD
EIOEMR5S2012R01

probe signal.
(2) The function measures the hole ID by moving the touch probe in the following sequence of
directions: X+, X-, Y+, Y-, X+ and X-.
For the MCM, the order of axis movements depends on the touch probe direction as indicated
below.
Gauging Order
Vertical Spindle
X+
X-
Y+
Y-
X+
X-
M73
(Front)
Y+
Y-
Z+
Z-
Y+
Y-
M74
(Left)
X+
X-
Z+
Z-
X+
X-
M75
(Rear)
Y+
Y-
Z+
Z-
Y+
Y-
M76
(Right)
X+
X-
Z+
Z-
X+
X-
MCM
Horizontal
spindle
(3) The touch probe stops at the center obtained as the result of the OD gauging cycle.
4297-E P-110
2-6.
End Face Gauging Cycle

The end face gauging cycle automatically measures the end face position inEeoemr5s2020
any of the following
directions: X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis directions.
2-6-1. X-axis End Face Gauging Operation

The X-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Eeoemr5s2021
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target X-axis end face using a part program.
gauging point.
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=(Anticipated X-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of X-axis movement is automatically determined
and the X-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
EIOEMR5S2013R01
4297-E P-111
This completes the X-axis end face OD gauging operation.
Example program
100
Touch probe
PEI
G0 X-120 Y0
G56 Z50 H1
M130
G1 Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=-100
G0 Z500
M02
EIOEMR5S2014R01
Machine operation
During the execution of the X-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
probe signal.
(2) The X-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The X-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that Y- and Z-axis do not move during the X-axis end face gauging cycle.
4297-E P-112
2-6-2. Y-axis End Face Gauging Operation

The Y-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Eeoemr5s2023
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target Y-axis end face using a part program.
gauging point.
CALL OO10 PMOD=2 PEI=(Anticipated Y-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of Y-axis movement is automatically determined
and the Y-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
EIOEMR5S2015R01

This completes the Y-axis end face OD gauging operation.
Machine operation
During the execution of the Y-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
probe signal.
(2) The Y-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The Y-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that X- and Z-axis do not move during the Y-axis end face gauging cycle.
4297-E P-113
2-6-3. Z-axis End Face Gauging Operation

The Z-axis end face gauging procedure is described below.
Eeoemr5s2025
Procedure :
1 Position the touch probe ball near the target Z-axis end face using a part program.
gauging point.
CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=(Anticipated Z-axis end face position)
M02
When the program is executed, the direction of Z-axis movement is automatically determined
and the Z-axis end face gauging cycle is then automatically executed.
EIOEMR5S2016R01

This completes the Z-axis end face OD gauging operation.
4297-E P-114
Machine operation
During the execution of the Z-axis end face gauging cycle, the touch probe moves as indicated
below.
probe signal.
(2) The Z-axis moves toward the target gauging end face and its position is measured.
(3) The Z-axis returns to and stops at the previously located position.
Note that X- and Y-axis do not move during the Z-axis end face gauging cycle.
4297-E P-115
2-7.
Saving of Gauging Cycle Results

Eeoemr5s2027
The results obtained from the gauging cycle are stored in the CNC memory, and
are updated to the
new results when the next gauging cycle is executed.
This data storage area where the data is updated every time a gauging cycle is executed is called A
memory.
The CNC memory also has an extra area in which all the results obtained from previous gauging
cycles are stored; it can be accessed as required. This data storage area is called B memory.
The procedure for transferring the contents in A memory to B memory is explained below.
Procedure :
1 Execute a gauging cycle for the first gauging point.
The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory.
2 Select the automatic mode and execute the following program. This is an example program
applicable when the gauging point is on an inner diameter.
CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=3
After the execution of the program, the data in A memory and that in B memory are swapped
and the data in A memory is saved in B memory.
Axes do not move even if the gauging result data is saved in B memory.
The setting for argument PAXI differs depending on the type of gauging cycle. See the table
below for this setting.
Gauging Cycle Type
PAXI =
Data Stored in A Memory
Center point of X- and Y-axis
Center point of X- and Z-axis

(Only for MCM horizontal spindle)
Center point of Y- and Z-axis

(Only for MCM horizontal spindle)
X-axis end face gauging
Gauging point on X-axis end face
Y-axis end face gauging
Gauging point on Y-axis end face
Z-axis end face gauging
Gauging point on Z-axis end face
ID gauging
OD gauging
3 Execute a gauging cycle for the next gauging point.

The result of the gauging cycle is stored to A memory. Since the previous result of gauging has
already been saved in B memory, it is not overwritten by the new result of gauging.
4297-E P-116
2-8.
Calculating the Center and Distance between Two Points

The center-point/distance (between points) calculation function calculates theEeoemr5s2028
center point and the
distance between two points, stored in A memory and B memory.
The distance is calculated in the X- and Y-axis components, individually.
The operating procedure for measuring two points (point 1 and point 2) and calculating the center
and the distance between them is described below.
Procedure :
1 Execute a gauging cycle at point 1.
The results obtained from measurement of point 1 are stored in A memory.
After the execution of the program, the data in A memory is saved in B memory.
3 Execute a gauging cycle at point 2.
The results obtained from measurement of point 2 are stored in A memory.
For the setting for argument PAXI, refer to the table in 2-7.
When the program is executed, the center point and the distance between points 1 and 2 are
calculated and stored in A memory.
This completes the center-point/distance (between two points) calculating operation.
EIOEMR5S2017R01
4297-E P-117
[Supplement]
Axes do not move during the execution of the center-point/distance (between two points) calculation function.
Example program
R10
300
Center-point
between two
points
300
Point 1
R15
Point 2
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z-5 H1
G0G56 Z10 H1
X300 Y-300
Z-5
G0 Z500
M02
EIOEMR5S2018R01
4297-E P-118
2-9.
Calculating the Center and Distance between Two End Faces

The center-point/distance (between end faces) calculation function calculatesEeoemr5s2029
the center point and
the distance between two end faces (distance/center between inner faces, distance/center between
outer faces of a projection).
2-9-1. Touch Probe Movements during Gauging of the Distance between Two End
Faces
(1) Gauging the center-point/distance between inner faces
Eeoemr5s2030
Skip feed
Rapid feed
EIOEMR5S2019R01
(2) Gauging the center-point/distance between outer faces of a projection
EIOEMR5S2020R01
4297-E P-119
2-9-2. Command Format of Center-point/Distance (between End Faces) Gauging

Program
(1) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between inner faces
Eeoemr5s2031
CALL OO10 PMOD=** PEL1=**

(PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**)
PELI
: Anticipated distance between two end faces
PCE
: Permissible center error
PGO=
1: Touch probe does not stop on occurrence of excessive error alarm.

0: Touch probe stops on occurrence of excessive error alarm.
PMOD= 11: X direction

12: Y direction
13: Z direction
PELE
: Permissible distance error
PUDT
: Undertravel distance (safety clearance to the sensor)
POVT
: Overtravel distance (sensor damage prevention distance)
VNUN
: Gauging cycle number
PMOD and PELl must always be designated.

EIOEMR5S2021R01
Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.

(2) Gauging cycle for calculating the center-point/distance between projection outer faces
CALL OO10 PMOD= ** PELI=** PIN=**

(PELE=**) (PCE=**) (PGO=*) (PUDT=**) (POVT=**) (VNUM=**)
PIN:
Infeed direction feed distance

EIOEMR5S2022R01
Other variables: Same as in (1)

PMOD, PELI and PIN must always be designated.
Variables in ( ) should be designated as needed.
4297-E P-120
2-9-3. Gauging Result Display Screen
Eeoemr5s2032
The results of center-point/distance (between end faces) gauging cycle are displayed
on the GAUGING RESULTS screen as shown below.
For the procedure for displaying the GAUGING RESULTS screen, refer to SECTION 1 [1-1. Displaying the Result of Gauging].
EIOEMR5S2023R01
a: EXPECTED CENTER POSITION

This indicates the positioning point at the start of the gauging cycle. Coordinate value is displayed
only for the gauging axis.
b: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value set for PCE).
A value is displayed only when PCE is set.
c: MEASURED CENTER POSITION
Coordinate value is displayed only for the gauging axis.
d: EXPECTED DISTANCE (value set for PELI)
A value is displayed only when PELI is set.
e: PERMISSIBLE ERROR (value for PELE)
A value is displayed only when PELE is set.
f: MEASURED DISTANCE
Distance (axis component) is displayed only for the gauging axis.
g: Result of evaluation
DECISION OK is displayed if the results of gauging are acceptable. In other cases, alarm contents
are displayed.
4297-E P-121
2-10. Automatic Zero Offset Function

Eeoemr5s2033
The automatic zero offset function automatically offsets the zero point so that the
point measured by
the dimension check function will take the desired coordinate values.
Zero offset is possible for a desired work coordinate system.
Procedure :
1 Execute a dimension check cycle for the point that should be established as the zero point.
It is possible to set the center point obtained as the result of center-point/distance calculation
function as the zero point.
CALL OO20 PHN=(Work coordinate system No. where zero offset is executed)
PX=(Coordinate value of X gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
PY=(Coordinate value of Y gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
PZ=(Coordinate value of Z gauging point after the execution of zero offset)
[Supplement]
1) Specify only the axis (PX, PY or PZ) for which zero offset is required.
2) Do not designate axes in which dimension check cycle has not been executed.
3) Zero offset is not executed unless PHN is designated.
An alarm (ALARM-B 2308) occurs.
After the execution of the program, the zero point of the work coordinate system specified by
PHN is offset so that the coordinate values of the measured point will take the value set for PX,
PY and/or PZ. The zero point is not offset for the unspecified axes.
The results can be checked by displaying the ZERO OFFSET screen.
The axes do not move even when the automatic zero offset is executed.
[Supplement]
1) Automatic zero offset is impossible if the CNC is reset after executing the dimension check function. An alarm (ALARM-B 2310) occurs.
2) Execute the automatic zero offset function immediately after executing a gauging cycle (ID, OD,
end face) or a center-point/distance calculation cycle.
Example program (To set the ID center X=0, Y=0)
300
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z-5 H1
CALL OO20 PHN=1 PX=0 PY=0
G0 Z500
M02
EIOEMR5S2024R01
4297-E P-122
2-11. Copying the Touch Probe Offset Data

Eeoemr5s2034
The touch probe offset data copying function is valid only for the MCM.
This function allows the touch probe length offset/radius compensation data, measured in the vertical spindle, to be used as the touch probe offset data for the horizontal spindle. This function is suitable for operations that require simple operation rather than high accuracy
Procedure :
1 Measure the length offset data and radius compensation data of the touch probe by mounting it
in the vertical spindle.
CALL OO22
M02
After the execution of the program, touch probe offset data set for VSTOH[5] and VSTOD[1] to
[4] is set for VSTOH[1] to [4] and VSTOD[5] to [20], where the offset data is set for the individual directions (M73, M74, M75 and M76) of the MCM.
The result of setting can be confirmed by opening the MSB ZERO OFFSET (VSZO[N]) popup window in the GAUGING RESULTS screen.
EIOEMR5S2025R01
[Supplement]
If touch probe offset data has already been set, the data is updated to the offset data obtained
using the touch probe mounted in the vertical spindle.
4297-E P-123
3.
Automatic Gauging Function for B-/C-axis, 90 Angular

and Extension Attachments (Option)
This function executes automatic gauging of the vertical spindle attachmentEeoemr5s2035
(also referred to as
attachment cover), 90 angular attachment, extension attachment, and B-/C-axis attachment
mounted in the spindle.
(PAC = 90)
(PAC = 180)
(PAC = 0)
(PAC = 270)
Z+
Y+
X+
EIOEMR5S2026R01
Fig.2-1 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of 90 Angular Attachment
PAC = 90
PAC = 180
PAC = 0
PAC = 270
PAB
Z+
Y+
X+
EIOEMR5S2027R01
Fig.2-2 Relationship between PAC Angles and X, Y, Z Axes of B-/C-axis Attachment
4297-E P-124
[Supplement]
1) PAB index angle should be PAB = 0 or PAB = 90.
2) The relationships between the items on the ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB) SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen and those on the ATTACHMENT SWlVEL COMPENSATION screen are indicated
below.
ATTACHMENT (PAC, PAB)

SWIVEL COMPENSATION screen
Data for PAC=0 PAB=0
ATTACHMENT SWlVE
COMPENSATION screen
H* in LOWER (G185) screen
EIOEMR5S2028R01
H*: Attachment compensation numbers H1 to H7

If two B-/C-axis attachments are used, set their data for the individual compensation numbers.
4297-E P-125
3-1.
Automatic Gauging for 90 Angular Attachment and B-/C-axis

Attachment (PAB=90)
The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below.
Eeoemr5s2036
(1) Touch probe radius compensation

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI= PAT= PAC=
PDI: Datum hole diameter
(2) Touch probe length offset
CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI= PLI= PAT= PAC=
PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face
PLI: Approximate length of touch probe
(3) ID gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI= PAT= PAC=
PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole
(4) OD gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI= PIN= PAT= PAC=
PDI: Anticipated outer diameter
PIN: Infeed direction feed distance
(5) End face gauging (X-axis)
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI= PAT= PAC=
PEI: Anticipated X-end face position
(6) End face gauging (Y-axis)
PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position
(7) End face gauging (Z-axis)
PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position
(8) Additional variables
PAT: Attachment switch compensation No. (1 to 7)
PAC: Direction of 90 angular attachment, B-/C-axis attachment (0, 90, 180, 270)
[Supplement]
1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified.
2) The value set for PAC is valid only when PAT is specified.
If PAC is not specified, PAC=0 is assumed.
3) The PAC value must be set meeting the mounting angle of the 90 angular attachment or the B/C-axis attachment (PAB=90).
4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.
4297-E P-126
3-2.
Automatic Gauging for Extension Attachment and B-/C-axis

Attachment (PAB=0)
The programs for executing the gauging functions are indicated below.
Eeoemr5s2037
(1) Touch probe radius compensation

CALL OO10 PMOD=9 PDI= PAT= PAV=1
PDI: Datum hole diameter
(2) Touch probe length offset
CALL OO10 PMOD=8 PEI= PLI= PAT= PAV=1
PEI: Z coordinate value of gauging face
PLI: Approximate length of touch probe
(3) ID gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI= PAT= PAV=1
PDI: Anticipated diameter of target hole
(4) OD gauging
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI= PIN= PAT= PAV=1
PDI: Anticipated outer diameter
PIN: Infeed direction feed distance
(5) End face gauging (X-axis)
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI= PAT= PAV=1
PEI: Anticipated X-end face position
(6) End face gauging (Y-axis)
PEI: Anticipated Y-end face position
(7) End face gauging (Z-axis)
PEI: Anticipated Z-end face position
(8) Additional variables
PAT: Attachment switch compensation No. (1 to 7)
PAV: Attachment type (1: Extension attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=0), 0 or omission:
90 angular attachment / B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90))
[Supplement]
1) The gauging cycle is executed using the vertical spindle if PAT is not specified.
2) The value set for PAV is valid only when PAT is specified.
If PAV is not specified, PAV = 0 (90 angular attachment/B-/C-axis attachment (PAB=90)) is
assumed.
3) When a gauging cycle is executed using the extension attachment or B-/C-axis attachment
(PAB=0), always set PAV = 1.
4) There are no other changes in the automatic gauging function.
4297-E P-127
4.
Power ON/OFF Cycle of Renishaw's Optical Touch Probe

(MP7/MP9/MP10)
The following describes the power ON/OFF cycle of Renishaw's Optical TouchEeoemr5s2038
Probe.
4-1.
Power ON/OFF Cycle Commands

The power ON cycle commands are indicated below.
Eeoemr5s2039
(1) MP7
CALL OO16
(2) MP9
CALL OO16
(3) MP10
CALL OO18 (PRS=)
PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orientation position.
The power OFF cycle commands are indicated below.
(1) MP7
CALL OO17
(2) MP9
Power is turned off in approximately 3 minutes after power ON.
(3) MP10
CALL OO19 (PRS=)
PRS:Specify the spindle index angle. If PRS is not specified, the spindle stops at the orientation position.
4297-E P-128
4-2.
Power ON/OFF Cycle Operation
4-2-1. Power ON Cycle Operation

OO16 (MP7/MP9)
Eeoemr5s2041
Machine operation
a) At the present position, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.
b) The spindle stops and the function checks whether the power has been turned ON correctly.
If the power is found not to have been turned ON, operation is suspended (dwell command)
for 7 seconds and then spindle start/stop is executed again.
If the power is not turned ON even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on the
screen and the machine stops.
2305 ALARM-B UNTENDED: gauging impossible 42
c) This completes the power ON cycle.
OO18 (MP10)
Machine operation
a) The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code
(M127) is output internally.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already ON.
b) After a dwell for 5 seconds, the function checks whether the power has been turned ON correctly.
If the power is found to have not been turned ON, operation is suspended (dwell command)
for 5 seconds and then M code output and a dwell for 5 seconds is executed again.
If the power is not turned ON even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on the
screen and the machine stops.
c) This completes the power ON cycle.
4297-E P-129
4-2-2. Power OFF Cycle Operation

OO17 (MP7)
Eeoemr5s2042
Machine operation
a) At the present position, the spindle rotates at 500 min-1.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.
b) The spindle stops and the function checks whether the power has been turned OFF correctly.
If the power is found not to have been turned OFF, operation is suspended (dwell command)
for 7 seconds and then spindle start/stop is executed again.
If the power is not turned OFF even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on
the screen and the machine stops.
c) This completes the power OFF cycle.
OO19 (MP10)
Machine operation
a) The spindle stops at the specified index position or orientation position, then an M code
(M127) is output internally.
Note that nothing happens if the power is already OFF.
b) After a dwell for 5 seconds, the function checks whether the power has been turned OFF
correctly.
If the power is found not to have been turned OFF, operation is suspended (dwell command)
for 5 seconds and then M code output and a dwell for 5 seconds is executed again.
If the power is not turned OFF even after this, the following alarm message is displayed on
the screen and the machine stops.
c) This completes the power OFF cycle.
NOTICE
When subprogram OO16 or OO17 is executed, the spindle speed command (S command) value
is changed to 500 (min-1). Therefore, the required spindle speed must be specified to start the
spindle after the execution of OO16 or OO17.
4297-E P-130
5.
Details
Eeoemr5s2043
The foregoing subsections described the basic operating procedure for using the
automatic gauging
functions.
This subsection gives detailed information on the automatic gauging functions.
5-1.
Touch Probe Movements

Touch probe movements are described in detail below, taking gauging for an Eeoemr5s2044
inner diameter as an
example.
(3)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(5)
(4)
: Cutting feedrate
: Rapid feedrate
(4)
EIOEMR5S2029R01
Touch probe movements in the ID gauging cycle consist of six passes (1) to (6), as shown in the
illustration above. Each of movements (1) to (6) may be regarded as a single gauging cycle on an
end face.
Therefore, touch probe movements are explained in detail for a single end face gauging cycle.
PUDT POVT
(1)
Position C
(2)
Position A
Position B
(2)
(3)
: Cutting feedrate
: Rapid feedrate
(3)
Anticipated end face position
EIOEMR5S2030R01
4297-E P-131
Machine operation
(1) The present position of the touch probe when subprogram OO10 is called is stored in the CNC
memory as position A.
(2) The position distanced from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured by the
amount set for PUDT is calculated.
This position is taken as position B. If PUDT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, PUDT
is automatically set as 10 mm.
(3) If position A is already closer to the anticipated position of the end face to be measured than
position B, then movement 4) is skipped and movement 5) is executed.
(4) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position B.
If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured, the touch probe will come into contact with the end face to be measured during the rapid
approach movement. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate
and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
If the touch probe stops during its advance due to signal reception error (for FM type touch
probe), it returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position B once
again.
If it stops again during this second advance due to signal reception error, it returns to position A
at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
(5) The function calculates the position beyond the anticipated position of the end face to be measured by the amount set for POVT. This position is taken as position C.
If POVT is not set when subprogram OO10 is called, POVT = 10 mm is assumed.
(6) The touch probe advances at a rapid approach speed to position C.
When it comes into contact with the end face to be measured during this advance, it stops at
that position.
If the actual position differs excessively from the anticipated position of the end face to be measured, the touch probe will fail to come into contact with the end face to be measured even after
it has reached position C. If this happens, the touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate and stops there with the gauging impossible error in effect.
probe), it returns to position B at a rapid feedrate and then advances toward position C once
again.
(7) The touch probe returns at a rapid feedrate to a position 0.5 mm away from the contact detected
position.
(8) The touch probe advances at a slow approach speed to a position 1 mm beyond the contact
detected position on the end face.
If the touch probe comes into contact with the end face to be measured again while it is advancing, it comes to a stop immediately.
probe), it returns to the position 0.5 mm away from the contact detected position at a rapid feedrate. After that it advances toward the end face to be measured once again.
4297-E P-132
(9) The touch probe returns to position A at a rapid feedrate.
[Supplement]
1) The position where the touch probe came into contact with the end face to be measured is the
position where the limit switch inside the touch probe was activated. Therefore, the actual position of the ball of the touch probe is 0.1 to 0.2 mm beyond the position where it has come into
contact with the end face to be measured.
2) When the gauging cycle has been completed, the touch probe comes to a stop at the center of
the hole on which measurement was carried out in the case of ID / OD gauging cycles.
3) For POVT and PUDT, set a value larger than 3 mm.
4297-E P-133
5-2.
Approach Speed to the Workpiece

Eeoemr5s2045
The approach speed at which the touch probe moves toward a workpiece is described
below.
Touch probe
(1)
(2)
(3)
Workpiece
EIOEMR5S2031R01
(1) First approach speed

The first approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves to the point
safety clearance away from the anticipated gauging point.
This feedrate is specified as PF1= when calling a subroutine.
The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.
Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is specified
X/Y direction: PF1 value
Z direction: 1/2 PF1 value
Approach speed to the workpiece when PF1 is not specified
X/Y direction: F4000
Z direction: F2000
(2) Second approach speed
The second approach speed represents the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from
the first approach point to the point where it comes into contact with the workpiece.
This feedrate is specified as PF2= when calling a subroutine.
The feed override function is valid for this feedrate.
Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is specified
X/Y/Z direction: PF2 value
Approach speed to the workpiece when PF2 is not specified
X/Y/Z direction: F1000
4297-E P-134
(3) Third approach speed
The third approach speed is the axis feedrate at which the touch probe moves from the point 0.5
mm away from the contact detected position to the position where the touch probe comes into
contact with the workpiece again.
The feedrate is fixed at F100 and the override function is not valid.
An example of OD gauging cycle (CALL O10 PMOD=6)
(1)
(8)
(7)
(2)
(6)
(9)
G00
(16)
G31
(14) (15)
(10)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(13)
(12)
(11)
EIOEMR5S2032R01
4297-E P-135
5-3.
Variables Used in Subprograms

Eeoemr5s2046
In this subsection, the variables necessary to make effective use of the automatic
gauging functions
are described
5-3-1. Table of Subprograms and Variables

Subprogram
Name
Variables for which Numerical

Value Must be Set
Eeoemr5s2047
Variable
which Must
Value Should be Set as
not be
Needed
Used
Datum Hole Zero

Point Setting
OO21
None
VNUM:
Gauging cycle number
None
Touch Probe
Radius Compensation
OO10
PMOD= 9
VNUM:
PDI:
Datum hole diameter
None
Touch Probe
Length Offset
OO10
VNUM:
PMOD= 8
Z-coordinate value of
PEI:
datum Z-end face
Approximate touch
PLI:
probe length offset
data
None
Inner Diameter
Gauging
OO10
PMOD= 7
PDI:
Anticipated hole
diameter
Permissible diameter error

Permissible hole
center position error
None
PDE:
PCE:
PGO:
=1
PUDT:
POVT:
PMSR:
=1
VNUM:
PF1:
PF2:
Does not cause

alarm stop on occurrence of excessive
error
Undertravel distance
Overtravel distance
Second gauging not
executed
1st approach speed
2nd approach speed
4297-E P-136
Subprogram
Name
Outer Diameter
Gauging
OO10

Value Must be Set
Variable
which Must
not be
Needed
Used
PDE:
PMOD= 6
Anticipated boss
PDI:
PCE:
diameter
Infeed direction feed
PIN:
PGO:
distance (PZIN)
=1
PUDT:
POVT:
PMSR:
=1
VNUM:
PF1:
PF2:
End face gauging
(X-axis)
OO10
PMOD= 1
PEI:
Anticipated X-end
face position
PEE:
PGO:
=1
PUDT:
POVT:
VNUM:
PF1:
PF2:
End face gauging
(Y-axis)
OO10
PMOD= 2
PEI:
Anticipated Y-end
face position
PEE:
PGO:
=1
PUDT:
POVT:
VNUM:
PF1:
PF2:
Permissible diameter error

Permissible center
position error
None
Does not cause

error
Overtravel distance
Second gauging not
executed
1st approach speed
2nd approach speed
Permissible error of
X-end face position
None
Does not cause

alarm stop on occurrence excessive
error
Overtravel distance
1st approach speed
2nd approach speed
Y-end face position
Does not cause
error
Overtravel distance
1st approach speed
2nd approach speed
None
4297-E P-137
Subprogram
Name
End face gauging
(Z-axis)
OO10

Value Must be Set
PMOD= 3
PEI:
Anticipated Z-end
face position
Variable
which Must
not be
Needed
Used
PEE:
PGO:
=1
PUDT:
POVT:
VNUM:
PF1:
PF2:
Gauging cycle for
calculating the
center-point/ distance between
inner faces
OO10
PMOD:
=11
X direction
Y direction
=12
Z direction
=13
PELI:
PCE:
PGO:
=1
=0
PELE:
PUDT:
POVT:
VNUM:
Z-end face position
Does not cause
error
Overtravel distance
1st approach speed
2nd approach speed
Anticipated distance
between two end
faces
Permissible center
error
Does not cause
error.
Causes alarm stop
on occurrence of
excessive error.
Permissible distance error
Undertravel distance (safety clearance to the sensor)
Overtravel distance
(sensor damage prevention distance)
PMOD and PELI must always

be specified.
None
4297-E P-138
Subprogram
Name
Gauging cycle for
calculating the
outer faces
OO10

Value Must be Set
PMOD:
=11
X direction
=12
Y direction
=13
Z direction
Variable
which Must
not be
Needed
Used
PELI:
PCE:
PGO:
=1
=0
PELE:
PUDT:
POVT:
PIN:
VNUM:
between two end
faces
Permissible center
error
Does not cause
error.
Causes alarm stop
on occurrence of
excessive error.
Permissible distance error
Undertravel distance (safety clearance to the sensor)
Overtravel distance
(sensor damage prevention distance)
Infeed direction feed
distance
PMOD, PELI and PIN must

always be specified.
Saving the gauging result data
OO10
PMOD= 15
PAXI:
Saving the X-axis
=1
data
Saving the Y-axis
=2
data
Saving the X-/Y-axis
=3
data
Saving the Z-axis
=4
data
Saving the X-/Z-axis
=5
data
Saving the Y-/Z-axis
=6
data
Saving the X-/Y-/Z=7
axis data
None
4297-E P-139
Subprogram
Name
Gauging cycle for
calculating the
two points
OO10

Value Must be Set
Variable
which Must
not be
Needed
Used
PE:
PMOD= 14
PXCI:
PAXI:
Calculation on the
=1
PXCE:
X-axis
Calculation on the Y=2
PXLI:
axis
Calculation on the
=3
PXLE:
X-/Y-axis
Calculation on the
=4
PYCI:
Z-axis
Calculation on the
=5
PYCE:
X-/Z-axis
Calculation on the Y=6
PYLI:
/Z-axis
Calculation on the
=7
PYLE:
X-/Y-/Z-axis
PZCI:
PZCE:
PZLI:
PZLE:
PGO:
=1
Automatic zero
offset
OO20
PHN:
PX:
PY:
PZ:
Coordinate system
number for which
zero point is offset
X coordinate value
after zero offset
Y coordinate value
after zero offset
Z coordinate value
after zero offset
Permissible error
Anticipated center
position - X
Permissible center
position error - X
Anticipated distance - X-X
Permissible distance error - X-X
Anticipated center
position - Y
Permissible center
position error - Y
- Y-Y
Permissible distance error - Y-Y
Anticipated center
position - Z
Permissible center
position error - Z
- Z-Z
Permissible distance error - Z-Z
None
Does not cause

error.
None
4297-E P-140
5-3-2. How to Use Variables

(1) PMOD (P MODE)
Designates the automatic gauging mode.
PMOD Setting
Gauging Mode
End face gauging cycle (X-axis)
End face gauging cycle (Y-axis)
End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)
OD gauging cycle
ID gauging cycle
Touch probe length offset
Touch probe radius compensation
14
Calculation of center and distance

between two points
15
Saving of the measurement results
Eeoemr5s2048
(2) PDI (P DIAMETER IDEAL VALUE)

Sets the anticipated diameter in the ID/OD gauging cycles.
(3) PDE (P DIAMETER ERROR LIMIT)
Sets the permissible error of the diameter for the ID/OD gauging cycles as an absolute value.
The hole dia. error over alarm occurs if:
PDE < | PDl - (Actual measured value of the diameter) |
The value obtained from the measurement in the X-axis direction is used as the actual measured value.
With the horizontal spindle of the MCM, the value measured in either the X- or Y- axis direction
is used as the actual measured value.
The measured diameter is not evaluated if PDE is not set. In this case, the result of judgment is
always OK.
(4) PCE (P CENTER ERROR LIMIT)
Sets the permissible error of the center position of a circle as an absolute value for ID/OD gauging cycles.
The X-axis permissible error, the Y-axis permissible error and Z-axis permissible error cannot
be set individually.
The excessive off-center alarm occurs when,
PCE < | (Anticipated center of X-axis) - (Actual measured center of X-axis) |
PCE < | (Anticipated center of Y-axis) - (Actual measured center of Y-axis) |
PCE < | (anticipated center of Z-axis) - (actual measured center of Z-axis) | (for MCM horizontal
spindle)
The anticipated centers of the X-, Y- and Z-axis are the actual positions of the X-, Y- and Z-axis
when the ID/OD gauging subprograms are called during the execution of a part program.
Error in the measured center position is not evaluated if PCE is not set.
(5) PIN (P IN)/PZIN (P Z IN)
Sets the Z-axis direction infeed distance as a relative value (positive incremental amount) for
the OD gauging cycle
(6) PEI (P EDGE IDEAL VALUE)
Sets the end face position of the gauging target for the X-, Y- and Z-axis end face gauging
cycles and the touch probe length offset cycle.
(7) PEE (P EDGE ERROR LIMIT)
Sets the permissible error of the end face position for an end face gauging cycle.
The excessive off-center alarm occurs when,
PEE< | PEI - (Actual measured value of end face) |
Error in the measured end face position is not evaluated if PEE is not set.
4297-E P-141
(8) PUDT (P UNDER TRAVEL)
Sets the undertravel distance as an absolute value.
During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position a certain amount
away from the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. This amount is set using
PUDT.
If no value is set for PUDT, the undertravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm.
The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe comes into contact with the workpiece while it is advancing at a fast feedrate up to this position. If an occurrence of this error is
suspected, PUDT should be set. Usually, set a value larger than 3 mm.
For the designation of PUDT, see examples 1 to 4.
(9) POVT (P OVER TRAVEL)
Sets the overtravel distance as absolute values.
During the execution of a gauging cycle, the touch probe moves to a position PUDT away from
the anticipated contact detection position at a fast feedrate. After this positioning, the touch
probe moves to a position a certain amount beyond the anticipated contact detection position at
a medium-fast feedrate. This amount is set using POVT.
If no value is set for POVT, the overtravel distance is automatically set at 10 mm.
The gauging impossible alarm occurs when the touch probe fails to contact the workpiece even
on reaching the position determined by POVT. If an occurrence of this error is suspected,
POVT should be set.
For the designation of POVT, see examples 1 to 4.
CAUTION
Since the touch probe stops when it comes into contact with the workpiece, setting a large
value for POVT will generally not cause a problem. However, it could cause the touch probe
unit to strike the workpiece if a contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch
probe itself.
When an axis movement command larger than the touch probe stylus stroke is set, the touch
probe will be damaged if the contact signal is not output due to the failure of the touch probe
itself.
Therefore, do not set an unnecessarily large value for POVT.
Example 1: PUDT and POVT not designated
If PUDT and POVT are not designated, 10 mm is automatically set as the undertravel
and overtravel distance.
Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40
Anticipated
position
X30
Actual
position
X40
X43
X50
Touch probe stops if contact

signal is not output.
PUDT=10
POVT=10
EIOEMR5S2033R01
4297-E P-142
Example 2: Only POVT designated
Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=2
X30
X35
X40
X42

PUDT=10
POVT=2
7mm
Set so that this distance is smaller than the

allowable over-stroke of the touch probe.
EIOEMR5S2034R01
Example 3 Only PUDT designated (PUDT = 15)

Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 PUDT=15
X25
X30
X40
X50

POVT=10
PUDT=15
EIOEMR5S2035R01
[Supplement]
Determine the PUDT value taking into consideration the allowable over-stroke of the touch
probe.
Example 4: Both POVT and PUDT designated (POVT = 5, PUDT = 15)
Example program:
CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=40 POVT=5
X25
X35
X40
X45

PUDT=15
POVT=5
EIOEMR5S2036R01
4297-E P-143
(10) PMSR (P MEASURE)
Usually, contact detection is executed two times in the X-axis direction when an ID/OD gauging
cycle is executed. If PMSR = 1 is set, however, the second contact detection cycle is not executed.
When the touch probe is set in the horizontal spindle of MCM, the second contact detection
cycle in the X or Y-axis direction is not executed.
(11) PGO (P GO)
When PGO = 1 is set, an alarm does not occur if the results obtained from the gauging
cycle exceed the permissible range. When PGO = 1 is set, judge the results of gauging
(OK/NG) in a part program by reading system variable VOK1 after the completion of an automatic gauging subprogram.
VOK1 = 0 when the result is OK.
Another system variable, VOK2, is also used for storing the result of the gauging cycle. Differing from system variable VOK1, which holds the result of the dimension check cycle executed immediately before its designation, VOK2 indicates, if VOK2 0, an occurrence that
the result of any one of dimension check cycles has exceeded the permissible error in all of
the dimension check cycles executed after VOK2 has been reset to 0 (VOK2 = 0).
In the case of the gauging impossible alarm, zero offset impossible alarm, command missing
error alarm or no subprogram function alarm, the CNC is alarm-stopped even if PGO = 1 is
set.
When PGO is not set, the CNC is alarm-stopped when the gauging cycle results have
exceeded the permissible error also.
Program example with "PGO = 1" setting

.
.
N24 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=80 PDE=0.05 PGO=1.......... ID gauging
N25 IF [VOK1 EQ 0] N29 ........................................................ Jumps to N29 if the result is OK.
N26 IF [VC930 GT 80000] N100.............................................. Jumps to N100 if the diameter is
greater than 80.05 mm.
N27 M0
N28 GOTO N18 ....................................................................... Re-machining
N29 M6
N30 T10
N31 G0 X140 Y0
.
.
EIOEMR5S2037R01
With the program above, the diameter of the hole finished by boring operation is measured
(N24). If the hole diameter is within a specified range (79.95 to 80.05 mm), the machining
cycle is continued. If the diameter is larger than 80.05 mm, the workpiece is determined
defective and the machining cycle is halted.
If the diameter is smaller than 79.95 mm, execution of the program is interrupted by the M0
command in N27. This allows the operator to adjust the boring bit, to carry out the boring
cycle on the same hole again.
(12) VNUM (V NUM BER)
Sets the gauging cycle number (range: 0 to 9999).
Before the execution of an ID/OD gauging cycle, touch probe length offset, or touch probe
radius compensation cycle, the present VNUM value is increased by 1 and the new number is
printed as the gauging cycle number
Once designated, VNUM is automatically increased by 1 at each execution of a gauging cycle
to be printed.
4297-E P-144
(13) PAXI (P AXIS)
Sets the target axes for saving the gauging cycle results or for calculating the center and distance between two points.
PAXI Setting
Target Axes
X-axis
Y-axis
X- and Y-axis
Z-axis
X- and Z-axis
Y- and Z-axis
X-, Y- and Z-axis
(14) PHN (P H NUMBER)

Sets the work coordinate system number for which zero offset is executed using the automatic
zero offset function.
When PHN is not set, this results in a command missing alarm.
(15) PX, PY, PZ
These variables set the coordinate values that the actual position should take after offsetting of
the zero point by the automatic zero offset function.
Set the coordinate value only for the axes on which zero offset is required.
For the undesignated axes, the zero offset data remains unchanged.
Example:
The procedure for offsetting the zero point of work coordinate system No. 2 so that
the center of an inner diameter will have the coordinate values X = 10, Y = 50 is
described below.
a) Execute the ID gauging cycle.

b) Execute the following program.
CALL OO20 PHN=2 PX=10 PY=50
(16) PXCI (P X CENTER IDEAL VALUE)/PYCI (P Y CENTER IDEAL VALUE)
/PZCI (P Z CENTER IDEAL VALUE)
These variables set the anticipated values of the center between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in
the calculation of the center/distance between two points.
When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle
result is not evaluated.
(17) PXCE (P X CENTER ERROR LIMIT)/PYCE (P Y CENTER ERROR LIMIT)
/PZCE (P Z CENTER ERROR LIMIT)
These variables set the permissible errors in the position of the center between two points (X-X,
Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute values.
When these values are not set, the center position obtained as the result of a gauging cycle is
not evaluated.
(18) PXLI (P X LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)/PYLI (P Y LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)
/PZLI (P Z LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)
These variables set the anticipated distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in the calculation of the center/distance between two points.
When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a
gauging cycle result is not evaluated.
4297-E P-145
(19) PXLE (P X LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)/PYLE (P Y LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)
/PZLE (P Z LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)
These variables set the permissible errors in the distances between two points (X-X, Y-Y, Z-Z) in
the calculation of the center/distance between two points. Designate absolute values.
When these values are not set, the distance between two points obtained as the results of a
gauging cycle result is not evaluated.
(20) PE (P ERROR)
For the designation of the cycle to calculate the center/distance between two points, if the same
value is assigned to permissible error values of the center position and the distance, variable
PE can replace the designation of PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE.
The following two programs have the same effect.
PXCE=0.01 PYCE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PXLE=0.01 PYLE=0.01 PZLE=0.01
PE=0.01
Note that PE is given priority over PXCE, PYCE, PZCE, PXLE, PYLE and PZLE. Therefore,
take care when using PE with other variables.
If the setting is, for example, as indicated below
PE=0.01 PZCE=0.02 PZLE=0.03
it is the same as
PE=0.01 PZCE=0.01 PZLE=0.01
(21) PELI (P EDGE LENGTH IDEAL VALUE)
Sets the anticipated distance between two faces.
(22) PELE (P EDGE LENGTH ERROR LIMIT)
Sets the permissible error between the distance set for PELI and the actual measured value.
4297-E P-146
5-3-3. Common Variables for Storing Gauging Cycle Results
Eeoemr5s2049
After the execution of an automatic gauging cycle, the obtained results can be checked
by displaying
the GAUGING RESULTS screen. In addition to this check, the results can be used in a part program to control program flow and other processing since they are stored in the common variables
indicated below.
Type of Gauging Cycle
Common
Variable
Type of Gauging Cycle
Common
Variable
ID gauging: Center (X)
VS29
Data saving: X-axis data
VS26
ID gauging: Center (Y)
VS28
Data saving: Y-axis data
VS25
ID gauging: ID
VS30
Data saving: Z-axis data
VS24
OD gauging: Center (X)
VS29
Center between two

points (X)
VS29
OD gauging: Center (Y)
VS28
Center between two

points (Y)
VS28
OD gauging: OD
VS30
Center between two

points (Z)
VS27
Type of
Gauging
Cycle
End face
gauging: Xaxis data
End face
gauging: Yaxis data
End face
gauging: Zaxis data
Common
Variable
VS29
VS28
VS27
Note that referencing of the common variables indicated above is not allowed in the usual common
variable reference method. To use the data stored in these common variables, move it to other common variables that can be referenced.
To reference the end face gauging result in the X-axis direction, move the data to VC1, for example,
by specifying VC1 = VS29, then read common variable VC1 in a part program.
[Supplement]
When the CNC is reset or the operation mode is changed to manual after the execution of a gauging cycle, the data obtained in this gauging cycle is cleared. In this case, it is necessary to execute
the gauging cycle again.
4297-E P-147
6.
Touch Probe Safety Measures
6-1.
Checking Proximity Switch Operation

Eeoemr5s2050
The touch probe signal is transmitted by the proximity switch. However, when
chips adhere to the
proximity switch, the touch probe signal may not be transmitted.
To check if the proximity switch is operating correctly, the following sequence is executed when an
automatic gauging cycle is executed.
Machine operation
(1) The touch probe signal is checked when an automatic gauging cycle subprogram OO10 is
called.
(2) If the signal is not output, the Z-axis moves to the travel end in the positive (+) direction and the
spindle starts rotating to remove chips.
(3) If the output of the signal is not confirmed even after the check above is repeated several times,
the operation is stopped by the gauging impossible alarm.
If the output of the signal is confirmed, the axes move to the gauging cycle start point at a rapid
feedrate.
[Supplement]
1) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, carry out this operation to confirm that the
signal is transmitted even if the proximity switch seems to be functioning correctly.
2) When the touch probe is set in the spindle manually, always orient the spindle before calling an
automatic gauging cycle subprogram.
3) With the FM type touch probe, operations of the proximity switch are not checked.
4297-E P-148
6-2.
Replacing the Touch Probe Battery

Eeoemr5s2051
The FM type touch probe has a battery incorporated in its body.
If a gauging cycle is executed while the battery voltage is low, the touch probe fails to function normally and the gauging cycle impossible alarm occurs.
(1) Checking the Battery
Press the battery ON switch halfway with the touch probe detached from the spindle.
The low battery voltage indicating LED should light in this condition.
If it is not lit, replace the battery.
If the low battery voltage indicating LED is blinking while the touch probe is set in the spindle,
replace the battery soon.
(2) Replacing the Battery
To replace the battery, follow the procedure indicated below. Take care not to bend the antenna
and battery holder while replacing the battery.
Battery ON switch
Cover
Battery and holder

Cover clamp nut
Stylus
Transmission antenna
Low battery voltage

indicating LED
There are two types of battery ON switch.
EIOEMR5S2038R01
Procedure :
1 Remove the cover clamp nut and the cover.
The battery incorporated in the touch probe body will be exposed.
2 Remove the battery from the battery holder.
3 Disconnect the battery connector and replace the battery with a new one.
[Supplement]
1) Battery type: Type OO6P (9 V, 2 pcs.)
2) Battery life: Approx. 40 hours in continuous use
3) You are recommended to remove the battery from the touch probe unit and store it properly
when the touch probe is not used.
4297-E P-149
7.
Supplementary Information
Supplementary information relating to the automatic gauging function is givenEeoemr5s2054
below. Before using
this function, make sure you fully understand the information below.
(1) All commands for programs are given in units of 1 mm or 0.001 mm. Commands should be
given in the unit presently selected.
Commands cannot be given in units of 0.01 mm.
(2) Cutter radius compensation mode cancel command (G40) is executed in an automatic gauging
cycle subprogram.
Note that S commands may be changed due to the execution of an automatic gauging cycle
subprogram.
(3) Do not call an automatic gauging cycle subprogram while a shift amount in a manual intervention operation remains.
If an automatic gauging cycle subprogram is called in this state, the gauging impossible alarm
occurs.
(4) The work coordinate system cannot be changed during the execution of an automatic gauging
cycle subprogram.
(5) The user area for tape storage length, number of work coordinate sets, number of tool offset
sets, and common variables is not used in execution of an automatic gauging cycle subprogram.
(6) Do not execute an automatic gauging/automatic zero offset cycle while using a local coordinate
system or the graphics enlarge/reduction mode.
(7) The permissible nesting level of subroutines during the execution of an automatic gauging subprogram is two.
Accordingly, nesting of the maximum of six levels is possible only when the automatic gauging
function is called.
(8) Do not call an automatic gauging subprogram in the machine coordinate system (H0).
(9) As with other tools, you are recommended to set the same number as the touch probe tool
number for VSTOH[5] as the tool offset number. This facilitates program and other checking
since the touch probe length offset data can be checked in the same way as for other tools.
(10) When setting a value for POVT, the restrictions indicated below apply. When a 100% feed override is set, the feedrate is F1000.
Example
1st Approach Speed (Feed Override Setting)
Min. POVT Setting
F1000 (100%)
2 mm
F1500 (150%)
3 mm
F2000 (200%)
4 mm
[Supplement]
The minimum value of POVT varies within a range of 2 to 5 mm depending on the servo characteristics.
(11) The diameter of holes or bosses to be measured must be larger than 20 mm.
(12) With MCM series machining centers, index the swivel head to the rear position (M75) when setting the touch probe in the vertical spindle.
If the touch probe is set in the vertical spindle with the swivel head at a position other than the
rear position, an alarm occurs (UNTENDED: gauging impossible 3C).
Note that the automatic or MDI mode must be selected when mounting the touch probe in the
vertical spindle.
4297-E P-150
(13) With MCM series machining centers, never execute the zero point setting cycle (OO21) for the
datum hole with the horizontal spindle.
(14) The direction of touch probe mounting in the spindle is determined by the machine model.
Therefore, pay attention to the direction when manually mounting the touch probe in the spindle.
(15) To check the touch probe function, follow the steps indicated below.
a) After entering VNCOM[1] = 8 in the MDI mode, press the CYCLE START button.
b) Manually move the touch probe right and left.
c) The characters touch probe on the screen (position display screen) are highlighted if the
touch probe is operating correctly.
The data at VNCOM[1] is reset to 0 when the CNC is reset or the operation mode is
changed to manual.
In this state, the displayed characters do not change even when the touch probe is moved.
CAUTION
If the touch probe is manually set in the horizontal spindle of an MCM series machining center to
execute the touch probe radius compensation cycle, always set the horizontal spindle tool command on the TOOL DATA SET screen.
Otherwise, the Z-axis will move and the touch probe will be broken.
4297-E P-151
8.
Program Examples
Examples of programs for using the automatic gauging function are described Eeoemr5s2055
below.
These examples may be used for reference when making your own programs.
8-1.
ID Gauging
Eeoemr5s2056
.
.
N36 T1......................................................................................... (T1: Touch probe)
N37 M6
N38 T17
N39 G0 X250 Y190.....................................................................Positioning at approximate center of
the hole to be measured
N40 G56 Z-10 H1....................................................................... Inserting the touch probe ball int the
hole
(H1: Tool offset number of the touch
probe)
N41 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=50 (PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)........(PDI: Anticipated ID)
(PDE: Permissible ID error)
(PCE: Permissible center position
error)
.
.
Executes the ID gauging cycle
.
.
N42 G0 Z300..............................................................................After the completion of the gauging
cycle, the touch probe ball remains
in the hole. Move the touch probe in
the Z+ direction.
.
.
EIOEMR5S2039R01
Touch probe
(X,Y)=250.190
PDI=50
EIOEMR5S2040R01
Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.
4297-E P-152
8-2.
OD Gauging
Eeoemr5s2057
.
.
N62 T1......................................................................... (T1: Touch probe)
N63 M6
N64 T12
N65 G0 X310 Y210 ..................................................... Positioning at approximate center of the

boss (OD) to be measured
N66 G56 Z40 H1.......................................................... Positioning of Z-axis at a point 10 to
several tens of mm above the gauging
point (see the illustration below.)
N67 CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=50 PZIN=30
(PDE=0.1 PCE=0.05)............ Executing the OD gauging cycle
(PDI: Anticipated OD)
(PZIN: Z-direction infeed amount)
(PDE: Permissible OD error)
(PCE: Permissible center position error)
.
.
EIOEMR5S2041R01
Positioning point before

start of gauging cycle
Positioning of Z-axis at
the gauging level
Workpiece to
be measured
Touch probe
PZIN = 30 mm
PDI = 50 mm
For PZIN, set the distance (Z-axis) from the positioning

point level to the gauging level.
EIOEMR5S2042R01
Variables PDE and PCE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, the errors are not evaluated.
After the completion of the gauging cycle, the touch probe stops at the center of the measured OD
(Z-axis retracts to the positioning point).
4297-E P-153
8-3.
End Face Gauging on Z-axis

Eeoemr5s2058
.
.
N95 T1.............................................................................. (T1: Touch probe)

N96 M6
N97 T4
N98 G0 X-25 Y60
N99 G56 Z80 H1
Positioning at a point 10 to several tens mm away from the Z-end

face to be measured
N100 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=35 (PEE=0.1).............. (PEI: Anticipated end face position)
(PEE: Permissible error)
N101 G0 Z300
.
.
EIOEMR5S2043R01
Position the touch probe ball at

a point 10 to several tens of mm
away from the target end face.
After the completion of the gauging
cycle, the touch probe returns to the
point where the first positioning was
completed.
PEI =
35 mm
EIOEMR5S2044R01
Variable PEE, specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If this variable is not specified, however, the error is not evaluated.
4297-E P-154
8-4.
Distance between End Faces (X-axis direction)

Eeoemr5s2059
.
.
N242 G0 X-20 Y60
N243 G56 Z-10 H1
Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from one

of the target end faces (end face A)
N244 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=0 ........................... End face gauging cycle on end face A
N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15 PAXI=1......................... Storing the result of gauging in B
memory
N246 G0 Z300
N247 X90
N248 G56 Z-10 H1
Positioning at a point 10 to several tens of mm away from the other

target end face (end face B)
N249 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=70 .......................... End face gauging cycle on end face B
N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14 PAXI=1
(PXCI=35 PXCE=0.05 PXLI=70 PXLE=0.05)............ Distance calculation cycle
(PXCI: Anticipated center position)
(PXCE: Permissible center position
error)
(PXLI: Anticipated distance between
end faces)
(PXLE: Permissible error of distance
between end faces)
N251 G0 Z300
.
.
N250 CALL OO10 PMOD=14...................................... No axis moves during the execution of
the distance calculationcycle
EIOEMR5S2045R01
End face A
End face B
PXCI = 35
10 to Several
tens of mm
PXCI = 70
10 to Several
tens of mm
Program zero
EIOEMR5S2046R01
Variables specified in parentheses ( ) may be omitted.

If they are not specified, however, errors are not evaluated.
When measuring the center and the distance between two points, the commands to store the first
gauging data in B memory are necessary (Example: N245 CALL OO10 PMOD=15).
4297-E P-155
If these commands are not specified, the result of the first gauging cycle is overwritten by the result
of the next gauging cycle.
For details on how to save the gauging result data refer to [2-7. Saving of Gauging Cycle Results].
8-5.
Automatic Zero Offset

Eeoemr5s2060
.
.
N412 G0 X40 Y50
N413 G56 Z-40 H1
N414 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=45 (PCE=0.03 PDE=0.05)..ID gauging cycle

N415 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PX=0 PY=0....................................For coordinate system No. 5, the
zero point (X = 0, Y = 0) is
established at the hole center
obtained by executing the ID
gauging cycle.
(PHN: Coordinate system No.)
N416 G0 Z300
N417 X60 Y60
N418 G56 Z-20 H1
N419 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=-30 (PEE=0.05)...................End face gauging cycle on Z- axis
N420 CALL OO20 PHN=5 PZ=0..............................................For the coordinate system No. 5,
the zero point (Z = 0) is
established at the end face
position obtained bexecuting the
end face gauging cycle
(Z-axis).N421 G0 Z300
EIOEMR5S2047R01
The zero point of coordinate system

No. 5 is set at the hole center and the
end face (face A).
Face A
30
Program zero
EIOEMR5S2048R01
On execution of sequences N415 and N420, no axis moves.

Execute the automatic zero offset cycle immediately after the execution of a gauging cycle (ID/OD
gauging cycle, end face gauging cycle, center/distance between two points calculation cycle).
Since an alarm occurs and zero offset is not executed if PHN is not set, always set it.
4297-E P-156
8-6.
Example Program for MCM Horizontal Spindle

4-M20
100
Eeoemr5s2061
2-10
DRILL
75
4-M6
Z
Y
EIOEMR5S2049R01
4297-E P-157
.
.
N1 G15 H1......................................................... Selecting work coordinate system No. 1
N2 G0 X-500 Y800 G56 H1
N3 T1................................................................. T1: Touch probe
N4 M6
N5 T10 .............................................................. T10: 17.5 drill
N6 G0 X0 Y0...................................................... Moving the X- and Y-axis to the anticipated
center of the 100 mm hole
N7 Z-5 H1.......................................................... Moving the touch probe ball into the hole
(H1: Touch probe length offset data)
N8 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=100 POVT=3.... ID gauging cycle at 100 mm hole
(PDI: Anticipated hole diameter)
(POVT: Overtravel distance)
N9 CALL OO20 PX=0 PY=0 PHN=1................. Zero offset according to the gauging results
(PX: X coordinate value after zero offset)
(PY: Y coordinate value after zero offset)
(PHN: Coordinate system No.)
N10 G0 Z100
N11 X75
N12 G56 Z30 H1............................................... Positioning of the Z-axis near the end face
(Z-axis)
N13 CALL OO10 PMOD=3 PEI=0 POVT=3
End face gauging cycle (Z-axis)

(PEI: Anticipated end face position)
N14 CALL OO20 PZ=0 PHN=1......................... Zero offset according to the gauging results
(PZ: Z coordinate value after zero offset)
N15 G0 Z400
N16 X500 Y800
N17 M6
N18 T11............................................................. T11: M20 tap
N19 NCYL G81 G56 R5 Z-58 F90 S450 H10.... Part program for machining at the workpiece
upper face
EIOEMR5S2050R01
4297-E P-158
.
.
N49 G0 Z400
N50 X500 Y800
N51 M67
N52 M77
N53 T15
N54 G0 Y0 M75 ................................................ M75: Indexing the swivel head to the rear
position
N55 G54 X-500 H1
N56 Z-170 ........................................................ Moving the Y- and Z-axis to the anticipated
center of the 75 mm hole
N57 X-270 ........................................................ Moving the touch probe ball into the hole
N58 CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=75.................. ID gauging cycle at 75 mm hole
N59 CALL OO20 PY=0 PZ=0 PHN=2 .............. Zero offset according to the gauging results
N60 G0 X-400
N61 Y60
N62 G54 X-300 H1............................................ Positioning of the X-axis near the end face
(X-axis)
N63 CALL OO10 PMOD=1 PEI=-280 .............. End face gauging cycle (X-axis)
N64 CALL OO20 PX=0 PHN=2 ....................... Zero offset according to the gauging results
N65 G0 X-400
.
.
Normal part program
.
.
EIOEMR5S2051R01
4297-E P-159
9.
Examples of Gauging Result Display

(1) Result of ID gauging
Eeoemr5s2064
EIOEMR5S2053R01
(2) Result of OD gauging
EIOEMR5S2054R01
4297-E P-160
(3) Result of end face gauging (X-axis)
EIOEMR5S2055R01
(4) Result of end face gauging (Y-axis)
EIOEMR5S2056R01
4297-E P-161
(5) Result of end face gauging (Z-axis)
EIOEMR5S2057R01
(6) Result of calculation of the center/distance between two points
EIOEMR5S2058R01
4297-E P-162
10.
Alarm List
10-1. Alarm List

Name of Alarm
Probable Cause
Eeoemr5s2062
Measures
to Take
UNTENDED:
gauging
impossible
(ALARM-B 2305)
At the end of the gauging impossible Refer to the Gauging Impossible

message, the cause code is disCause Code Chart and eliminate the
played.
cause.
UNTENDED:
no subprogram
function
(ALARM-B 2311)
Although there is no automatic zero

offset specification, an attempt was
made to call the automatic zero offset
subprogram.
UNTENDED:
command
missing
(ALARM-B 2308)
An undefined number was set for

variable PMOD.
Check the value set at PMOD.
There is no PDI setting for ID/OD

gauging cycle, or for touch probe
radius compensation cycle.
For the ID/OD gauging cycle, set an

anticipated diameter for PDI. For the
touch probe radius compensation
cycle, set an accurate ID for PDI.
"ALARM-B 2305
UNTENDED:
gauging impossible "
Cause code
There is no PHN setting in automatic Set the work coordinate system numzero offset commands.
ber for which zero offset is to be executed for PHN.
There is no PEI setting for the end
face gauging cycle (X, Y or Z), or for
the touch probe length offset cycle.
For the end face gauging cycle, set

an anticipated end face position for
PEl. For the touch probe tool length
offset cycle, set accurate Z end face
position data for PEI.
UNTENDED:
hole dia.
error over
(ALARM-B 2306)
The difference between the anticipated diameter and the actual diameter obtained as the result of ID/OD
gauging cycle has exceeded the permissible error (PDE).
UNTENDED:
off centerline
(ALARM-B 2307)
The difference between the anticipated center position and the actual
center position obtained as the result
of the ID/OD gauging cycle has
exceeded the permissible error
(PCE).
The difference between the anticipated end face position and the
actual end face position obtained as
the result of the end face gauging
cycle (X, Y, Z) has exceeded the permissible error (PEE).
4297-E P-163
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
UNTENDED:
center distance
error over
(ALARM-B 2312)
Name of Alarm
The difference between the anticipated value (center position and distance between two points) and the
actual value obtained as the results
of the gauging and calculation cycle
has exceeded the permissible error.
UNTENDED:
zero offset
impossible
(ALARM-B 2310)
Since the results of the dimension

check executed immediately before
the automatic zero offset function
were NG, zero offsetting is impossible.
Touch probe
battery
(ALARM-D 4223)
Automatic zero offset is executed

although a dimension check is not
executed.
Automatic zero offset is possible only

after a dimension check has been
executed.
Automatic zero offset is executed

after pressing the RESET button following the execution of a dimension
check.
If the RESET button is pressed after

executing the dimension check, the
results of the gauging cycle are
cleared and thus the automatic zero
offset is impossible. In this case, the
dimension check must be executed
again.
Replace the battery.

The battery incorporated in the
Kuroda touch probe has expired. The
life expiration signal is turned on.
<I/O bit>
I/O check No. 22 Bit 7 (MX-V series)
ON (green): Abnormal
OFF: Normal
The input bit position varies according to the machine model. For the bit
position, refer to the wiring diagram.
4297-E P-164
10-2. Gauging Impossible Cause Code Chart (Alarm B 2305)

Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Eeoemr5s2063
Used
Subprograms
A maker subprogram is called while

Call a maker subprogram after selectthe machine coordinate system (H0) is ing a work coordinate system (G15 H1,
selected
for example).
OO10
OO30
The mirror image function is active.
Cancel the mirror image function first.
OO10
OO30
Manual shift amount (total) remains.
Cancel the manual shift amount (total)

to zero.
OO10
OO30
In the G11 mode (parallel or rotation

shift of a coordinate)
OO10
In the G51 mode

(graphics enlargement/reduction)
OO10
T number is zero (0), or no tool is set.
Specify a T number.
OO30
Specify the PTLN command.

7
Specified T number or PTLN command is larger than the maximum offset number.
Specify a T number or PTLN command within the allowable range.
The power to the probe is not on when Check the following:

the flash on cycle is attempted.
Is there any obstacle between the
receiver head and the probe?
OO30
OO15
Is the spindle index angle for the

probe correct?
Does the receiver head flash?
When positioning the Y and Z axes,
position them within the range of
PCHK from the touch sensor zero
point.
OO30
The offset amount of the positioning

point for cycle start from the touch sensor zero point is greater than PCHK
(only for Y and Z axes).
The touch probe microcomputer stays Check whether chips are accumulating
on.
on the proximity switch.
OO10

The result of the touch probe test is
NG.
The touch probe signal cannot be confirmed.
OO10
approach feedrate (X-axis).
OO10
With the FM type touch probe, reception of signals is not correct.

PUDT setting

middle approach feedrate (X-axis).

OO10

POVT setting

final approach feedrate (X-axis).
OO10
4297-E P-165
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take

tered.
10
approach feedrate (Y-axis). When

middle approach feedrate (Y-axis).
11
Used
Subprograms
OO10
OO10

PUDT setting
OO10

POVT setting
12

final approach feedrate (Y-axis). When
OO10
13

Check if the touch probe has chattered.
although the touch probe is brought
OO10
14
approach feedrate (Z-axis). When

middle approach feedrate (Z-axis).
16

final approach feedrate (Z-axis).
17

tered.
into contact with a workpiece (Z-axis).
OO10
18
The touch probe contacts the workCheck the following items:

piece during the approach to the exter Start point of the gauging cycle
nal diameter in the OD gauging cycle.
Assumed OD value
OO10
19
PLH is not designated.
Set tool length offset number for PLH.
1A
PDH is not designated.
Set the cutter radius compensation

number for PDH.
15
OO10

PUDT setting
OO10

POVT setting
OO10
4297-E P-166
Code
(HEX)
1B
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
In the C-axis gauging cycle, contact is Check the following items:

detected during the approach to the
Is start point of the C-axis gauging
gauging point.
cycle correct?
Used
Subprograms
OO10
Is PDl value correct?

Is PGI value correct?
1C

X-axis direction motion within the
value error)
OO100
1D

Y-axis direction motion within the
value error)
OO100
1E

Z-axis direction motion within the
value error)
OO100
1F

for the vertical spindle longitudinal

(within 10 mm)?
OO30
20
In the touch sensor zero setting cycle Check the start point of the cycle; is it
for the vertical spindle radial direction, close to the touch sensor
the cutting tool fails to contact the sen- (within 10 mm)?
sor.
OO30
21

for horizontal spindle longitudinal
22

(within 10 mm)?
contact the sensor.
OO30
23

has already been on. (X direction)
OO100
24

has already been on. (Y direction)
25

has already been on. (Z direction)
Check the start position of the cycle; is

it close to the touch sensor
(within 10 mm)?
OO30
4297-E P-167
Code
(HEX)
Probable Cause
Measures to Take
Used
Subprograms
26

approach (X direction), the value is
27

approach (Y direction), the value is
28

approach (Z direction), the value is
29
Check if the anticipated tool length is

correct. (for tool length offset cycle)
cycle for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction, the cutting tools
OO30
2A

Is the anticipated tool length corcycle for the vertical spindle in the
rect? (for tool length offset cycle)
radial direction, the cutting tools fails to
contact the sensor.
cycle)
OO30
2B

longitudinal direction, the cutting tool
OO30
Is the anticipated tool length correct? (for tool length offset cycle)
cycle)
2C

Is the anticipated cutter radius
cycle for the vertical spindle in the
correct? (for tool length offset
cycle)
contact the sensor.
cycle)
OO30
2D
In the automatic tool length offset cycle Check if PL1 is appropriate.

in the X-axis direction (with angular
attachment), the cutting tool fails to
contact the sensor.
OO30
33
In the U-center zero setting cycle, the Check the following items:
cutting bit contacts the sensor, or the
Is the sensor zero point set corcontact signal is input, in a sequence
rectly?
in which the cutting bit should not con Is the cutting bit free of chips?
tact the sensor.
Is the sensor signal correct?
4297-E P-168
Code
(HEX)
34
Probable Cause
In the U-center zero setting cycle, no
contact signal is input.
Measures to Take
Used
Subprograms

Is PD value correct?
to the CNC?
35

sor while the Y-axis is being fed in a
to the CNC?
detected.
36

the cutting bit fails to contact the touch
Is the U-axis command too large?
sensor.
to the CNC?
37
In the U-center radius adjusting cycle, Check if the sensor signal is correctly
sensor in the sequence in which the Uaxis adjusted amount is checked on
the Y-axis.
38

In the tool breakage detection cycle,
the cutting bit contacts the touch sen Is the sensor zero point set corsor while the Y-axis is being fed in a
rectly?
detected.
to the CNC?
39

sor in a sequence in which the Y-axis
Is the U-center bit free of chips?
positioning is executed to a point distanced from the current position by the
compensation amount.
to the CNC?
3A

sensor in a sequence in which the cutting bit radial position is corrected in
the U-axis adjusting cycle.
3B

After the completion of U-axis compensation in the tool wear compensa- input to the CNC.
tion cycle, the cutting bit fails to contact
the touch sensor in the sequence in
which the adjusted amount is checked
in the Y-axis movement.
3C
Execute the gauging cycle after indexWhen the gauging cycle is executed
ing the swivel head to the M75 (rear)
with a touch probe set in the vertical
spindle of the MCM, swivel head is not position.
in the M75 (rear) position.
OO10
4297-E P-169
Code
(HEX)
3D
3E
3F
40
Probable Cause
Measures to Take

for the vertical spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel
head is not in the M73 (front) position,

position.

for the vertical spindle in the radial
is not in the M73 (front) position, or the

position.

for the horizontal spindle in the longitudinal direction on the MCM, the swivel
head is not in the M76 (right) position,

position.

for the horizontal spindle in the radial
is not in the M76 (right) position, or the

position.
Used
Subprograms
OO30

OO30

OO30

OO30
41
Check if the T command is correct.

The tool number for the angular
attachment is T52 or T53. (For the
angular attachment tool, only T51 (90
angular attachment) can be used for
tool length offset).
42

touch probe cannot be turned on.
OO16
OO18
43

touch probe cannot be turned off.
OO17
OO19
4297-E P-170
SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION
SECTION 3
1.
GAUGING DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION
Overview
Eeoemr5s3001
The gauging data output function outputs the gauging results obtained by executing
the automatic
tool length offset/compensation function, automatic tool breakage detection function, or the automatic gauging function, to the connected RS-232C device.
1-1.
Parameters
Eeoemr5s3002
In order to use the gauging data output function, the parameters indicated below
must be set.
EIOEMR5S3001R01
OUTPUT FUNCTION IS MADE EFFECTIVE

Sets whether the output function is valid or invalid.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
DOES NOT
DOES/DOES NOT
DESIGNATION OF OUTPUT DEVICE

Sets the RS-232C channel device name.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
CN0:
CN0:/CN1:/CN2:
RS232C STOP BIT

Sets the number of stop bits for the designated RS-232C device.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
1/2
4297-E P-171
RS232C PARITY BIT

Sets the parity scheme for the designated RS-232C device.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
ODD
NON/EVEN/ODD
BAUD RATE (BPS)

Sets the baud rate for the designated RS-232C device.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
600
110 to 19200 [bps]
FLOW CONTROL
Sets the data processing method for the designated RS-232C device.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
DC CODE
DC CODE/BTR (NO DC CODE)/ RS/CS
8bit JIS
Sets if the characters set by 8-bit JIS code are directly output or converted into 7-bit JIS code for the
designated RS-232C device.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
8bit JIS
8bit JIS/7bit JIS
READY WAITING TIME

Sets the waiting time for starting communications with the designated RS-232C device.
If the device fails to get ready within the set length of waiting time, an alarm occurs.
1-2.
Initial Setting
Setting Range
10
1 to 9999 [sec]
Output Operation
Eeoemr5s3003
It is possible to output the results of gauging after the execution of a workpiece
gauging cycle, an
automatic tool length offset cycle or an automatic tool breakage detection cycle.
Whether or not the results are output is set for system variable VPRT.
VPRT = 1:Gauging results are output.
VPRT = 0:Gauging results are not output.
Before executing a gauging cycle, set VPRT (=1 or 0) in the MDI mode or automatic mode and
press the CYCLE START button.
When the power is turned ON, the setting for VPRT is VPRT = 0.
4297-E P-172
1-3.
Example Program
Eeoemr5s3004
R100
EIOEMR5S3002R01
VPRT=1....................................................................... Output valid

G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z50 H1
M130
G1 Z-5 F1000
M131
CALL OO10 PMOD=7 PDI=200 ..................................Outputs the gauging results.
G0 Z500
VPRT=0 ...................................................................... Output invalid
G0 X0 Y0
G56 Z10 H1
CALL OO10 PMOD=6 PDI=200 PZIN=15 .................. Does not output the gauging results.
G0 Z500
M02
Touch probe length offset data
EIOEMR5S3003R01
4297-E P-173
1-4.
Example of Outputs
Eeoemr5s3005
The following shows an example of output of the gauging results.
INSIDE DIAMETER
No. 5
EXPECTED VALUE
PERMISSIBLE ERROR
MEASURED VALUE
DECISION OK
X
-42.227
0.050
-42.228
WORK SURFACE
No. 6
EXPECTED VALUE
PERMISSIBLE ERROR
MEASURED VALUE
NO DECISION
X
0.000
Y
49.911
0.050
49.911
D
30.150
30.152
0.009
OUTSIDE DIAMETER No. 11

EXPECTED VALUE
PERMISSIBLE ERROR
MEASURED VALUE
ALARM: ALIGNMENT OUT OF TOLERANCE
X
73.606
0.050
74.873
Y
287.131
0.050
286.087
D
30.150
OUTSIDE DIAMETER No. 12

EXPECTED VALUE
PERMISSIBLE ERROR
MEASURED VALUE
DECISION OK
X
74.896
0.050
74.896
Y
286.085
0.050
286.086
D
29.050
ZERO OFFSET POSITION

COORDINATES
No. 19
X
60.256
Y
286.086
29.946
29.946
.
.
.
.
TOOL LENGTH OFFSET: TOOL MANAGEMENT No. 29 COMPENSATED VALUE 0.400
TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION: TOOL MANAGEMENT No. 29 DECISION OK
.
.
EIOEMR5S3004R01
4297-E P-174
1-5.
Output Items
Eeoemr5s3006
The data to be output is indicated below.

Maker
Subprogram
Gauging Mode
Output Items
(1) Anticipated value (in the gauging
direction)
End face gauging
(2) Permissible error (in the gauging

direction)
(3) Actual measured value (in the
gauging direction)
(4) Evaluation
direction)
OO10
ID/OD gauging

direction)
gauging direction)
(4) Evaluation
direction)
Center/distance between two points

direction)
gauging direction)
(4) Evaluation
OO20
Automatic zero offset
Zero offset data of the work coordinate system for which automatic zero
offset was executed.
Tool length offset data of the tool for

which automatic tool length offset
was executed.
Automatic tool breakage detection
Tool breakage detection result of the

tool for which automatic tool breakage detection was executed, and the
tool breakage judging value when the
tool breakage was detected.
OO30
4297-E P-175
2.
Interface Specifications for Connecting VP-600

Eeoemr5s3007
The interface specifications for connecting a VP-600 printer (Epson) are indicated
below.
2-1.
Connection Diagram
The signal connections between the VP-600 and CNC are shown below.
Eeoemr5s3008
Signal
Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal
Name
FG
PG
TxD
RD
RxD
SD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
SG
CD
RG1
DSR
DTR
20
DCD
EX-INT
23
20
DTR
EIOEMR5S3005R01
4297-E P-176
2-2.
Parameters
The parameter settings for connecting the VP-600 are indicated below.
OUTPUT FUNCTION IS MADE EFFECTIVE DOES
DESIGNATION OF OUTPUT DEVICE
CN0:
RS232C STOP BIT
RS232C PARITY BIT
EVEN
BAUD RATE (BPS)
2400
FLOW CONTROL
DC CODE
8bit JIS
8bit JIS
READY WAITING TIME
30
Set the following parameter data when you use Epson VP-600.
Parameter
Set value
Character quality
Draft
Character code table
Katakana code table
Page length setting of continuous form
11 inch
Single slip supply position setting
8.5 mm
1-inch perforation skip
OFF
Auto tear off
OFF
Graphic print direction setting
Bidirectional
ESC/P super
ON
Auto line feed
OFF
Interface
Internal serial
Baud rate
2400 bps
Parity check
None
Data length selection
8 bit
EXT/ACK selection
OFF
Answer of status
OFF
For details, refer to the instruction manual attached to the printer.
Eeoemr5s3009
4297-E P-177
SECTION 4 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE
SECTION 4
1.
GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE
Outline
Eeoemr5sb001
The print statement has been used to output the data and character strings of
the variables to the
panel CRT or an external device (such as a printer).
In addition to these output operations, this function allows output of the variables data to a file
(MD1:A.MDF).
2.
Parameters
2-1.
NC Optional Parameter Bit

Eeoemr5sb002
No.
bit
Description
The print function outputs variables data to an external

device on reception of a print command.
Effective
Ineffective
16
If a print command is issued while the file is accessed in

the program operation mode or MD1: does not have
enough free area, an alarm C will occur.
Alarm C
"3237"
Alarm D
"4262"
32
The print function outputs data to a file (A.MDF) regardless of the variable data (VPRT) for designating the displaying device.
Does
Does not
4297-E P-178
3.
Designation of Displaying Device

Eeoemr5sb003
The displaying device designation signal is output with a variable VPRT as shown
in the table below.
Unit of variables data
Output device
Not output
Minimum unit
system
VPRT = 0
Standard unit
system
VPRT = 4
Output to an external device
VPRT = 1
VPRT = 5
Output to the panel CRT
VPRT = 2
VPRT = 6
Output to an external device and the panel CRT
VPRT = 3
VPRT = 7
Output to a file
VPRT = 8
VPRT = 12
Output to an external device and a file
VPRT = 9
VPRT = 13
Output to the panel CRT and a file
VPRT = 10
VPRT = 14
Output to an external device, the panel CRT, and a file VPRT = 11
VPRT = 15
Note 1 : Output to an external device is effective only when a checkmark is set at the checkbox
of the NC optional parameter (bit) No.2, bit4.
Note 2 : If a checkmark is set at the checkbox of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 32 bit 5,
data is output to the file (MD1:A.MDF), regardless of the variable (VPRT) for designating
the displaying device.
Note 3 : The gauging data obtained by execution of an MSB is not output to a file even when the
relevant value is set at the variable VPRT.
It is output only when a checkmark is set at the NC optional parameter (bit) No.32, bit 5.
Note 4 : For the output in minimum unit system or standard unit system, refer to the explanation
about the print command of the floating-point variable described in 4-1, *3.
4.
Print Command
Eeoemr5sb004
The value or the character string of the specified variable is output to an external
device such as a
printer, the panel CRT, or a file according to the variable (VPRT) for designating the displaying
device.
If a variable or a character string is omitted, only a line is fed. The area used to display the variable
data and character string are already divided and allocated to each system variable used. If a space
is used as a delimiter, the variable data or character string is displayed immediately after the previously printed data without line feed.
Command format
Sample statement
1)
PRINT [<Expression> ---]
2)
LPRINT [<Expression> ---]
3)
SPRINT [<Expression> ---]

PRINT "ABC"
When the command 1) is specified, the specified variable data and the character strings are displayed with normal characters. When the command 2) is specified, they are displayed with enlarged
characters. When the command 3) is specified, they are displayed with normal characters without
line feed.
Note 1: The LPRINT command (enlarged display) is effective only for the printer OKUMA PP-5000EPSON. Enlarged characters are not displayed on the CRT panel or a file. They are displayed with normal characters even though the LPRINT command is issued.
4297-E P-179
4-1.
System Variables for Printing

<Expression>
Eeoemr5sb005
Output
example
Range
VINTG
Integer type variable
[Sample statement] PRINT VINTG
-99999999 to 99999999
" -99999999"
VNUM
[Sample statement] PRINT VNUM
-999 to 999
VOK1
[Sample statement] PRINT VOK1
0 to 5, 10 to 15
Normal chars (Enlarged chars)

" " VOK1=0 (VOK1=10)
" OK" VOK1=1 (VOK1=11)
"+OK" VOK1=2 (VOK1=12)
"+NG" VOK1=3 (VOK1=13)
"-NG" VOK1=4 (VOK1=14)
" NG" VOK1=5 (VOK1=15)
[3 digits]
VOK2
[Sample statement] PRINT VOK2
1, 2
"TOTAL OK" VOK2=1

"TOTAL NG" VOK2=2
[8 digits]
VPCNT
Variable for printer control code
[Sample statement] SPRINT VPCNT
0 to 255
(0 to 127) *2
$1F (hexadecimal 1 byte)

When VPCNT=31
VC**, VPRT
Floating-point variable
[Sample statement] PRINT VC1
-99999999 to 999999999
(Max 8 digits)
In millimetes
" -99999.999"
In inches
" -9999.9999"
[12 digits]
"NO. 9"
[7 digits]
[12 digits]
"--------"
Character string
[Sample statement] PRINT "ABC"
Max number of characters: 80 "ABC"
#----H
Characters displayed in hexadecimal
[Sample statement] PRINT #B1B2B3B4H
Max number of characters: 4
"aiue"
*1
: If the variable is EMPTY, a blank "
" is output.
*2
: If you output the printer control code (VPCNT) without setting a checkmark at the NC
optional parameter (bit) No.8, bit 0 (8bit JIS), the data from 0 to 127 ($00 to $7F) are output
with the parity bit (bit7).
When the PRINT VPCNT is specified, the line feed command is output after the printer control code. Therefore if you want to output only the printer control code, specify the SPRINT
VPCNT.
4297-E P-180
*3
: For the floating-point variable, the displayed data varies depending on weather the minimum unit system is selected or the standard one is selected for the VPRT that designates
the displaying device (see item 3. Designation of Displaying Device).
Unit
Description of floating-point variable
Output example
Standard unit system

VPRT=4 to 7
Metric
VC**=12.34
12.340
Inch
VC**=12.34
12.3400
Minimum unit system

VPRT=0 to 3
Metric
VC**=12.34
0.012
Inch
VC**=12.34
0.0012
*4
When a checkmark is set at the checkbox of the NC optional parameter bit No. 3, bit 0, the
inch unit system is selected. If not, metric is selected.
The data, which can be displayed in minimum unit system, may exceed 8 digits if converted into the standard unit system. In that case, the following indication appears:
" +OVER FLOW" or " -OVER FLOW"
: Only the following codes are output to a file (MD1:A.MDF):
space ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 to 9 : ; < = > ? @ A to Z [ \ ] a to z { | }(
The other codes are replaced with "?".
4297-E P-181
SECTION 5 MANUAL GAUGING
SECTION 5
MANUAL GAUGING
1.
Overview
1-1.
Specifications
Eeoemr5s4001
The manual gauging function is used to set the zero point, tool length offset data,
etc., using a touch
probe or a touch sensor.
Differing from the automatic gauging and automatic tool length offset functions, the manual gauging
function sets the data in an interactive operation using comments displayed on the screen and also
specially provided switches. Therefore, the operator does not have to learn special gauging function
programs.
This function allows you easy and quick data setting without referring to the programming manual,
and can be used effectively in the following cases:
Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining a one-of-a-kind workpiece
Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece, and beginning production from the next workpiece, using the set data.
Setting the zero point or the tool offset data when performing machining jobs by interrupting lot
production using the same part program.
4297-E P-182
1-2.
Overview of Manual Gauging Functions

Eeoemr5s4002
The following is an outline of the manual gauging functions.
General configuration of manual gauging functions is shown in [1-3. List of Display Screens].
1-2-1. Work Gauging Function
Eeoemr5s4003
The work gauging function measures the workpiece length, hole diameter, center
position, etc. using
a touch probe, and executes zero offset. Zero offset is automatically executed after the completion
of a gauging cycle. To execute only measurement, skip the zero offset process.
This work gauging function provides the following gauging patterns. Choose the appropriate pattern
according to the shape of the target to be measured.
(1) End face (X, Y, Z)
(2) Center of ID
(3) Center of OD
(4) Center between two internal faces
(5) Center between two external faces
(6) Inclination and corner
EIOEMR5S4001R01
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles] for the preparation necessary before starting a work gauging cycle.
4297-E P-183
1-2-2. Tool Length Gauging Function
Eeoemr5s4004
The tool length gauging function measures the tool length using a touch sensor
and executes tool
offset according to the result of gauging.
Use a reference tool, or a tool of whose length from the gauge line to the tool nose is known, as a
gauge.
EIOEMR5S4002R01
Either of the following two types of tool offset is executed.

The difference between the measured length and the length of the tool used as the gauge is
taken as the tool length offset data.
Reference
tool
"L" is registered as the tool length offset data.

EIOEMR5S4003R01

The length from the gauge line to the tool nose is taken as the tool length offset data.
Gauge line
L
"L" is registered as the tool length offset data.
EIOEMR5S4004R01
4297-E P-184
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-1. Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles] for the preparation necessary before starting a tool length gauging cycle.
1-2-3. Cutter Radius Gauging Function

The cutter radius gauging function measures the radius of a tool with a touch Eeoemr5s4005
sensor oriented horizontally, and executes cutter radius compensation according to the result of gauging.
Use a reference tool or a tool whose radius is known as a gauge.
EIOEMR5S4005R01
[Supplement]
Refer to [3-2. Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle] for the preparation necessary
before starting a cutter radius gauging cycle.
4297-E P-185
1-2-4. Gauging Preparation Function

The gauging preparation function is provided to perform the preparatory stepsEeoemr5s4006
required for the work
gauging, tool length gauging or cutter radius gauging function. Execute this gauging preparation
function before starting a manual gauging cycle.
EIOEMR5S4006R01
Preparation for starting a work gauging cycle

Before starting a work gauging cycle, set the length offset data and the radius compensation
data (in the four directions X+, X-, Y+ and Y-) of the touch probe.
After selecting A. PREPARATION OF WORK GAUGING/TOOL LENGTH GAUGING, execute
the preparation functions in the order indicated below.
a) A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL)
b) A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET
c) A-3. TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP
[Supplement]
1) Once length offset and radius compensation have been executed for the touch probe, they do
not need to be executed every time a work gauging cycle is executed. Execute them from time
to time as needed.
2) After a feeler has been replaced or a feeler strikes a workpiece or other object, touch probe
length offset/radius compensation must always be executed.
3) To obtain high accuracy in the work gauging operation, the run-out of the touch probe must be
minimized.
Preparation for starting a tool length gauging cycle
Before starting a tool length gauging cycle, select A. PREPARATION OF WORK GAUGING/
TOOL LENGTH GAUGING then execute A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL).
Preparation for starting a cutter radius gauging cycle
Before starting a cutter radius gauging cycle, select B. PREPARATION OF CUTTER RADIUS
GAUGING then execute B-1. REF POS SET FOR CUTTER RADIUS COMP.
End Face
(X, Y, Z)
ID Center
Reference Position Setting for

Cutter Radius Compensation
Inclination
and Corner
Gauging Preparation Menu
Touch Probe Radius

Compensation
Center between Two

Internal Faces
Cutter Radius Gauging
Touch Probe Length Offset
Center between Two

External Faces
Tool Length Gauging
Reference Face Setting

(Reference Tool)
OD Center
Work Gauging Menu
1-3.
Manual Gauging Menu
4297-E P-186
List of Display Screens

The screens used for manual gauging operation and configuration of them areEeoemr5s4007
shown below.
EIOEMR5S4007R01
4297-E P-187
2.
Basic Operation
Since manual gauging is executed in the manual operation mode, all manualEeoemr5s4008
operations, such as
rapid feed, jog feed, and pulse handle feed, are permitted during the execution of a gauging cycle.
When moving an axis to a position close to the target, move it at a rapid feedrate, and for the detection of contact of the touch probe or touch sensor, move the axis using the pulse handle.
The desired manual gauging function can be selected from the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.
Display the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen by following the procedure indicated below, then perform the desired function.
Procedure :
1 Select the manual mode.
2 Press function key [F1] (MANUAL GAUGING).
The operation mode changes to the manual gauging mode and the MANUAL GAUGING
MENU screen is displayed.
[Supplement]
If function key [F1] MANUAL GAUGING is not displayed, press the [EXTENSION] key so that the
MANUAL GAUGING function is assigned to [F1].
EIOEMR5S4008R01
4297-E P-188
3.
Preparation for Gauging

Eeoemr5s4009
The gauging preparation function is provided to perform the preparatory steps
required for a work
gauging, tool length gauging or cutter radius gauging function. Execute this function before starting
a manual gauging cycle by following the procedure indicated below.
3-1.
Preparation for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles

Procedure :
Eeoemr5s4010
1 Prepare a touch sensor, touch probe, master ring and sling gauge.
2 Mount the touch sensor and the master ring on the table.
3 Select the manual operation mode.
The screen shown below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4009R01
4 Press function key [F1] (MANUAL GAUGING).
4297-E P-189
The MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4010R01
5 Press function key [F4] (GAUGING PREPAR).

The GAUGING PREPARATION menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4011R01
[Supplement]
The comment MOVE CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON is displayed on a menu
screen. When this comment is displayed, the desired item can be selected by using the cursor
and the WRITE key as well as by function key operation.
4297-E P-190
6 Press function key [F1] (WORK/TOOL LEN).
The A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL) screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4012R01
7 Move the table to a position where ATC operation will not cause interference.
8 Move the cursor to NXT TOOL, input the tool number of the reference tool and press the
WRITE key.
9 Press the 1 CYCLE START key on the ATC operation panel to mount the reference tool in the
spindle.
10 Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Feed the reference tool with the x1 multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch sensor red LED lights when the reference tool contacts the touch sensor.
Reference tool
Red LED (lit)
Touch sensor
EIOEMR5S4013R01
Execute zero offset at this position to store the touch sensor position.
System zero offset No. 10 is used exclusively for registering the touch sensor position and not
used in an ordinary program.
4297-E P-191
11 Move the cursor to ZERO OFFSET X and the following comment is displayed.
WRITE A 0
EIOEMR5S4014R01
12 Input 0 as instructed by the comment.

The zero offset data X is rewritten and the X coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to 0.
The cursor automatically moves to ZERO OFFSET Y.
13 Input 0 for Y also.
The Y coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes to 0 and the cursor automatically moves to
ZERO OFFSET Z.
The following comment is displayed when the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET Z.
WRITE A 0 FOR A REL OFST OR WRITE THE REF TOOL-1 FOR A ABS OFST.
14 Input 0 and press the WRITE key.
The zero offset data displayed on the screen is automatically rewritten and the Z coordinate
value of ACT POSIT changes to 0.
The preparatory steps for tool length gauging are now complete.
For a work gauging cycle, proceed to the following after pressing function key [F7] (NEXT).
[Supplement]
If the absolute offset type is selected, the distance between the gauge line and the tool nose is
written. In this case, the written value is set for the coordinate value of ACT POSIT.
4297-E P-192
15 Move the reference tool away from the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle then move
the table to a position where ATC operation will not cause interference.
16 With the A-1. REFERENCE SURFACE SET (REF TOOL) screen displayed, press function key
[F7] (NEXT).
The A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET screen, shown below, will be displayed.
Tool length offset No. 21 is exclusively used for storing the touch probe length offset data.
EIOEMR5S4015R01
17 Move the cursor to NEXT TOOL and the following comment is displayed.
WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER AND START ATC 1 CYCLE
18 Input the tool number of the touch probe as instructed by the comment.
19 Press the 1 CYCLE START key on the ATC operation panel to mount the touch probe to the
spindle. The NEXT TOOL column now shows NONE.
20 The cursor automatically moves to TOOL LENGTH OFFSET and the following comment is
displayed on the screen.
PRESS WRITE BUTTON
21 Bring the touch probe into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Feed the touch probe with the x1 multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The red LED of both the touch sensor and the touch probe lights when the touch probe contacts the touch sensor.
22 At the contact position, press the WRITE key.
The tool length offset data is rewritten.
This completes the length offset operation for the touch probe. Press function key [F7] (NEXT)
to execute the touch probe radius compensation.
4297-E P-193
23 In the state the A-2. TOUCH PROBE LENGTH OFFSET screen is displayed, press function
key [F7] (NEXT).
The A-3. TOUCH PROBE RADIUS COMP screen, shown below, is displayed with the following
comment.
FIND THE REF RING CENTER AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON AT THAT POS
EIOEMR5S4016R01
24 Move the cursor to REF RING DIA, and the following comment is displayed.
WRITE THE DIAMETER OF THE REFERENCE RING
25 Input the diameter of the master ring and press the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to REF POSITION X and the following comment is displayed.
FIND THE REF RING CENTER AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON AT THAT POS
26 Manually remove the touch probe from the spindle and mount the sling gauge.
27 Bring the sling gauge into contact with the master ring by operating the pulse handle. Align the
spindle center with the master ring center by turning the spindle.
Sling gauge
Master ring
Table
EIOEMR5S4017R01
28 While the spindle center is aligned with the master ring center, make sure that the cursor is on
REF RING CENTER X and press the WRITE key.
4297-E P-194
29 Move the cursor to REF RING CENTER Y and press the WRITE key.
The ACT POSIT data of X and Y will be X0 and Y0. Note that the Z-axis coordinate value
may not be set.
30 Manually remove the sling gauge from the spindle and mount the touch probe.
31 Manually orient the spindle.
32 Manually move the touch probe into the master ring approximately 7 mm by operating the pulse
handle, then move it into the X+ side (position 1 in the guide diagram) to make it contact the
master ring.
Be sure to select the x1 multiplication ratio to bring the touch probe into contact with the master ring.
The red LED of the touch probe lights when contact is detected.
33 Move the cursor to RAD COMP 1 (+X Ds21) and press the WRITE key.
34 Repeat the same steps for RAD COMP 2, RAD COMP 3 and RAD COMP 4.
Note that the ACT POSIT data must be 0 when setting the touch probe radius compensation
data as indicated below.
ACT POSIT Y = 0 for setting RAD COMP 1 (+X) and RAD COMP 2 (-X)
ACT POSIT X = 0 for setting RAD COMP 3 (+Y) and RAD COMP 4 (-Y)
35 When the compensation data is displayed for all of RAD COMP 1 (+X) to RAD COMP 4 (-Y),
check the displayed data.
Preferably, mutual differences should be within 0.03 mm.
This completes the touch probe radius compensation operation.
The screen returns to the GAUGING PREPARATION screen.
The screen returns to the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen.
4297-E P-195
3-2.
Preparation for Cutter Radius Compensation Cycle

Procedure :
Eeoemr5s4011
1 With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen is displayed, press function key [F2] (CUTTER
RADIUS).
For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [3-1. Preparation
for Work Gauging/Tool Length Gauging Cycles].
The B-1. REF POS SET FOR CUTTER RADIUS COMP screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4018R01
2 After moving the cursor to REF TOOL DIA, input the diameter of the reference tool and press
the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to REF POSITION X and the following comment is displayed.
MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON
3 Manually orient the spindle.
4 Bring the reference tool into contact with the touch sensor by operating the pulse handle.
Feed the reference tool with the x1 multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch sensor red LED lights when the reference tool contacts the touch sensor.
5 At the position where contact is detected, press the WRITE key.
The data at REF POSITION X is rewritten and the X coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes
to 0.
The cursor moves to REF POSITION Y.
6 Press the WRITE key.
The data at REF POSITION Y is rewritten and the Y coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes
to 0.
The cursor moves to REF POSITION Z.
4297-E P-196
The data at REF POSITION Z is rewritten and the Z coordinate value of ACT POSIT changes
to 0.
This completes the preparation for cutter radius gauging operation.
The screen returns to the GAUGING PREPARATION screen.
4297-E P-197
4.
Work Gauging
4-1.
End Face Gauging (X, Y, Z)

End face gauging is used for setting the zero point at the end face.
Eeoemr5s4012
Procedure :
1 With the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen displayed, press function key [F1] (WORK GAUGING).
For the procedure to display the MANUAL GAUGING menu screen, refer to [2. Basic Operation].
The WORK GAUGING menu screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4019R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-198
2 Press function key [F1] (X,Y,Z END FACE).
The WORK GAUGING 1. X,Y,Z END FACE screen, shown below, is displayed.
EIOEMR5S4020R01
The cursor moves to AXIS SELECT and the following comment is displayed.
SELECT AXIS BY CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4297-E P-199
3 Move the cursor to an axis position (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z) as instructed by the comment and
press the WRITE key to select an axis.
The axis name of the selected axis is displayed for AXIS SELECT and the cursor moves to
END FACE POS.
EIOEMR5S4021R01
For ZERO OFFSET NO. and the H number of ACT POSIT, the currently valid zero offset
number is displayed. In the example screen above, H1 is displayed for both items.
[Supplement]
To execute only a gauging cycle without zero offset, select the zero offset number for which
the gauging cycle is to be executed in the MDI mode and perform a manual gauging operation.
The following comment is displayed.
TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4 Bring the touch probe into contact with the end face to be measured as instructed by the comment. For this operation, use the pulse handle.
Feed the touch probe with the x1 multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch probe red LED lights when it contacts the end face.
4297-E P-200
The end face position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor
moves to ZERO OFFSET NO.
EIOEMR5S4022R01

WRITE THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM THE FORMS THE ZERO OFFSET
6 Input the work coordinate system number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE
key.
The data for all of END FACE POS, ZERO OFFSET, and SCT POS is changed to the data
in the selected work coordinate system.
When ZERO OFFSET NO. is written, the cursor moves to the ZERO OFFSET data position.
EIOEMR5S4023R01
4297-E P-201
WRITE THE POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE
7 Input the end face position data (X, Y, Z) in the new work coordinate system, as instructed by
the comment, and press the WRITE key.
To set the end face position to 0, input 0, and to set the end face position to -50, input 50.
The set end face position (X, Y, Z) is displayed at END FACE POS on the screen and the
ZERO OFFSET data is automatically rewritten.
The cursor returns to AXIS SELECT.
EIOEMR5S4024R01
8 To execute the same gauging cycle for other axes, repeat steps 3) to 7) for the desired axes.
9 After finishing gauging for all desired axes, press function key [F8] (CLOSE).
The screen returns to the WORK GAUGING menu screen.
4297-E P-202
4-2.
I.D. Center Gauging

Eeoemr5s4013
I.D center gauging is used to set the zero point at the center of an I.D.
This function calculates the center of the specified I.D. by bringing the touch probe into contact with
four points on the I.D.
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4025R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-203
2 Press function key [F2] (I.D. CENTER).
The WORK GAUGING 2. I.D. CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
EIOEMR5S4026R01
The cursor is positioned on TOUCH POS 1 with the following comment displayed on the
screen.
POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND THE CENTER
TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 1 TO MOVE X AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON
3 Position the touch probe near contact position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram) and bring it
into contact with the I.D. at position 1 as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to
move the touch probe for contact detection.
Move the touch probe with the x1 multiplication ratio setting to detect the contact.
The touch probe red LED lights when contact is detected.
The coordinate values of the contact position in the presently selected coordinate system are
displayed.
The cursor moves to TOUCH POS 2 and The following comment is displayed on the screen.
5 Position the touch probe near contact position 2 (position 2 in the guide diagram) by moving it
only in the X-axis direction, and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 2 as instructed by
the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection.
Move the touch probe with the x1 multiplication ratio setting to detect contact.
If the Y-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
4244 there axis not indicated has been moved
This alarm is automatically cleared when the Y-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate
system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 1.
4297-E P-204
displayed.
The cursor moves to TOUCH POS 3 and the following comment is displayed on the screen.
TOUCH THE TOUCH POS. 3 TO MOVE Y AXIS & PRESS WRITE BUTTON
displayed.
only in the Y-axis direction, and bring it into contact with the I.D. at position 4 as instructed by
the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the touch probe for contact detection.
If the X-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
This alarm is automatically cleared when the X-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 3.
The coordinate values of the contact position, in the presently selected coordinate system, are
displayed. The cursor moves to CENTER POS/RAD.
EIOEMR5S4027R01
4297-E P-205
11 With the cursor on CENTER POS/RAD, press the WRITE key.
The data is automatically displayed as shown below and the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET
NO..
EIOEMR5S4028R01
When the cursor comes to ZERO OFFSET NO., The following comment is displayed.
key.
The data of TOUCH POS, CENTER POS/RAD, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT, with
the exception of D, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
EIOEMR5S4029R01
4297-E P-206
When the data is set for ZERO OFFSET NO., the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET X and the
following comment is displayed.
OFFSET X and the following comment is displayed.
13 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the I.D. center in the new coordinate system and press
the WRITE key.
The set I.D. center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at CENTER POS and the data
of TOUCH POS, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT are updated accordingly.
The cursor automatically returns to TOUCH POS.1.
EIOEMR5S4030R01
This completes the I.D center gauging operation.

4297-E P-207
4-3.
O.D. Center Gauging

Eeoemr5s4014
O.D. center gauging is used to set the zero point at the center of an I.D.
This function calculates the center of the specified I.D. by bringing the touch probe into contact with
four points on the I.D.
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4031R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-208
2 Press function key [F3] (O.D. CENTER).
The WORK GAUGING 3. O.D. CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
EIOEMR5S4032R01
The cursor is positioned on TOUCH POS 1 with the following comment displayed on the
screen.
FEED THE TOUCH PROBE CLOSE TO THE WORKPIECE POSITION1
displayed.
The cursor moves to TOUCH POS 2 and The following comment is displayed on the screen.
POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND 2 SHOWN IN DRAWING TO MOVE Z & X AXIS
only in the X- and Z-axis direction and bring it into contact with the O.D. at position 2 by moving
it only in the X-axis direction as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the
touch probe for contact detection.
If the Y-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
This alarm is automatically cleared when the Y-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate
system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 1.
4297-E P-209
displayed.
displayed.
POS. TOUCH PROBE TO AROUND 4 SHOWN IN DRAWING TO MOVE Z & Y AXIS
only in the Y- and Z-axis direction and bring it into contact with the O.D. at position 4 by moving
it only in the Y-axis direction as instructed by the comment. Use the pulse handle to move the
touch probe for contact detection.
If the X-axis is moved during this positioning, an alarm occurs and the following alarm message
is displayed.
This alarm is automatically cleared when the X-axis coordinate value in the machine coordinate system agrees with the Y data of TOUCH POS 3.
4297-E P-210
displayed. The cursor moves to CENTER POS/RAD.
EIOEMR5S4033R01

PRESS WRITE BUTTON
11 With the cursor on CENTER POS/RAD, press the WRITE key.
The data is automatically displayed as shown below and the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET
NO..
EIOEMR5S4034R01
When the cursor comes to ZERO OFFSET NO., the following comment is displayed.
4297-E P-211
key.
The data of TOUCH POS, CENTER POS/RAD, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT, with
the exception of D, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
EIOEMR5S4035R01
4297-E P-212
13 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the I.D. center in the new coordinate system and press
the WRITE key.
The set O.D. center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at CENTER POS and the data
of TOUCH POS, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT are updated accordingly.
The cursor automatically returns to TOUCH POS.1.
EIOEMR5S4036R01
This completes the O.D. center gauging operation.

4297-E P-213
4-4.
Internal Faces Center Gauging

Eeoemr5s4015
The center gauging function for two internal faces (groove center gauging function)
is used to set the
zero point at the center of the two internal faces.
The function provides two modes of operation to calculate the center - 2-point contact and 3-point
contact.
4-4-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact

Which of the gauging modes is used can be selected by parameter setting orEeoemr5s4016
by using the buttons
on the screen.
Selection by parameter
To select the contact mode by parameter setting, use CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 48, bit 3.
Without check mark: 2-point contact
With check mark: 3-point contact
[Supplement]
If the gauging mode is selected by parameter, the screen display is not changed unless the
screen is closed and redisplayed.
Selection with buttons
For selecting the gauging mode, the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons are provided
on the screen. Select the desired gauging pattern by pressing the corresponding button.
EIOEMR5S4037R01
4297-E P-214
Procedure :
1 Move the cursor to either of the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons.
The gauging mode is selected and the corresponding screen is displayed.
4-4-2. Internal Face Center Gauging in 2-point Contact Mode
Eeoemr5s4017
The function calculates the center of two internal faces by bringing the touch probe
into contact with
the internal faces at two points.
To use this function, the 2-point contact mode must be selected. If the 3-point contact mode is presently selected, change the gauging mode to the 2-point contact mode by referring to [4-4-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact].
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4038R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-215
2 Press function key [F4] (INT END CENTER).
The WORK GAUGING 4. INT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
EIOEMR5S4039R01
The following comment is displayed on the screen.

3 Select the axis (X or Y) used for gauging and press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment.
The selected axis is displayed at AXIS SELECT and the cursor moves to TOUCH POS 1.
EIOEMR5S4040R01

TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON.
4297-E P-216
4 Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the end face.
Move the touch probe with the x1 multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.
The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe contacts the end face.
moves to TOUCH POS 2.
6 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact the other end face, then press the
WRITE key.
When position 2 is set, the cursor moves to CENTER POS.
EIOEMR5S4041R01

PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4297-E P-217
7 Press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment.
The coordinate values of the center position are automatically displayed and the cursor moves
to ZERO OFFSET NO..
EIOEMR5S4042R01

key.
The data of TOUCH POS, CENTER POS, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT, with the
exception of L, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
EIOEMR5S4043R01
4297-E P-218
9 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two internal faces in the
new coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
The set center coordinate values, X and Y, are displayed at CENTER POS and the data of
TOUCH POS, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT are updated accordingly.
The cursor automatically returns to AXIS SELECT.
EIOEMR5S4044R01
This completes the internal face center gauging operation.

4297-E P-219
4-4-3. Internal Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode
Eeoemr5s4018
This function calculates the center of two internal faces by bringing the touch probe
into contact with
the internal faces at three points.
[Supplement]
Even if the 3-point contact mode is selected, it is possible to calculate the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal faces at two points. For details, refer to [4-4-4.
Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode].
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4045R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-220
2 Press function key [F4] (INT END CENTER).
The WORK GAUGING 4. INT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed with the cursor
positioned at TOUCH POS 1.
EIOEMR5S4046R01

TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON IF 2 POSITIONS GAUGING,
SELECT AXIS
[Supplement]
To execute gauging with touch probe contact at only two points, move the cursor AXIS
SELECT, select an axis (X or Y), then move the cursor TOUCH POS 1 again.
3 Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the internal face at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram).
The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe detects a contact.
4 At the position where the contact is detected, press the WRITE key.
IF SELECTING 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, DONT GAUGE THIS POSITION
4297-E P-221
5 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact position 2 and position 3 (positions
2 and 3 in the guide diagram).
[Supplement]
1) At positions 1 and 2, gauging is executed on one internal face, and at position 3, gauging is
executed on the other internal face that is parallel to the first internal face.
2) To execute this gauging operation by bringing the touch probe into contact with the internal
faces at two points, skip the contact at position 2 (TOUCH POS 2).
When positions 2 and 3 are set, the cursor moves to CENTER POS.
EIOEMR5S4047R01

PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4297-E P-222
The data is automatically displayed for CENTER POS, distance between end faces (L) and
inclination angle (), then the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET NO..
EIOEMR5S4048R01
The data is obtained in the manner indicated below for each item.
CENTER POS:
The center position between positions 1 and 3 is calculated

assuming that the end faces are parallel to each other.
Distance between end faces (L):The distance between two end faces in the right angle direction to the faces is calculated assuming that the inclined face
gauged at positions 1 and 2 and the other face gauged at position 3 are parallel with each other.
Inclination angle ():
The angle made between the inclined face gauged at positions

1 and 2, and the X-axis is calculated.

4297-E P-223
key.
The input number is displayed at ZERO OFFSET NO. and the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET data position.
EIOEMR5S4049R01

8 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two end faces in the new
coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S4050R01
4297-E P-224
This completes the internal face center gauging (3-point contact mode) operation.
4-4-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode
Eeoemr5s4019
To obtain the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact at only two
points after selecting the 3-point contact mode, the operation procedure differs from the normal gauging operation in
the following points.
Selection of an axis is necessary.
Contact detection is not carried out at position 2 but must be carried out at positions 1 and 3.
Center position, distance between end faces and inclination angle are calculated as indicated below.
Center position:
The center between positions 1 and 3
Distance between end faces (L):Distance between positions 1 and 3

If the X-axis is selected for AXIS SELECT, this angle is 90.

If the Y-axis is selected for AXIS SELECT, this angle is 0.
[Supplement]
To execute gauging at only two points although the 3-point contact mode is selected, no data must
be displayed for TOUCH POS 2 (immediately after the data is cleared or the start of this gauging
operation).
For details of operation, refer to [4-4-3. Internal Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode].
4297-E P-225
4-5.
External Faces Center Gauging

Eeoemr5s4020
The center gauging function for two external faces (projection center gauging function)
is used to set
the zero point at the center of the two external faces.
The function provides two modes of operation to calculate the center - 2-point contact and 3-point
contact.
4-5-1. Selecting 2-point/3-point Contact

Which of the gauging modes is used can be selected by parameter setting orEeoemr5s4021
by using the buttons
on the screen.
Selection by parameter
To select the contact mode by parameter setting, use CNC optional parameter (bit) No. 48, bit 3.
Without check mark: 2-point contact
With check mark: 3-point contact
[Supplement]
If the gauging mode is selected by parameter, the screen display is not changed unless the
screen is closed and redisplayed.
Selection with buttons
For selecting the gauging mode, the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons are provided
on the screen. Select the desired gauging pattern by pressing the corresponding button.
EIOEMR5S4051R01
Procedure :
1 Move the cursor to either of the [2 POSITIONS] and [3 POSITIONS] buttons.
The gauging mode is selected and the corresponding screen is displayed.
4297-E P-226
4-5-2. External Face Center Gauging in 2-point Contact Mode
Eeoemr5s4022
The function calculates the center of two external faces by bringing the touch probe
into contact with
the external faces at two points.
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4052R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-227
2 Press function key [F5] (EXT END CENTER).
The WORK GAUGING 5. EXT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed.
EIOEMR5S4053R01

3 Select the axis (X or Y) used for gauging and press the WRITE key as instructed by the comment.
The selected axis is displayed at AXIS SELECT and the cursor moves to TOUCH POS 1.
EIOEMR5S4054R01

TOUCH THE END FACE AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON.
4297-E P-228
4 Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the end face.
The touch probe red LED lights when the touch probe contacts the end face.
6 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact the other end face, then press the
WRITE key.
When the position 2 is set, the cursor moves to CENTER POS.
EIOEMR5S4055R01

PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4297-E P-229
The coordinate values of the center position are automatically displayed and the cursor moves
to ZERO OFFSET NO..
EIOEMR5S4056R01

key.
The data of TOUCH POS, CENTER POS, ZERO OFFSET and ACT POSIT, with an
exception of L, is updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
When the data is set for ZERO OFFSET NO., the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET X,
EIOEMR5S4057R01
4297-E P-230
9 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two external faces in the
new coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S4058R01
This completes the external face center gauging operation.

4297-E P-231
4-5-3. External Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode
Eeoemr5s4023
The function calculates the center of two external faces by bringing the touch probe
into contact with
the external faces at three points.
[Supplement]
Even if the 3-point contact mode is selected, it is possible to calculate the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact with the external faces at two points. For details, refer to [4-5-4.
Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode].
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4059R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-232
2 Press function key [F5] (EXT END CENTER).
The WORK GAUGING 5. EXT END CENTER screen, shown below, is displayed with the cursor positioned at TOUCH POS 1.
EIOEMR5S4060R01

IF 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, SELECT AXIS
[Supplement]
To execute gauging by making the touch probe contact only at two points, move the cursor
AXIS SELECT, select an axis (X or Y), then move the cursor TOUCH POS 1 again.
3 Move the touch probe in the selected axis direction using the pulse handle to bring it into contact with the internal face at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram).
IF SELECTING 2 POSITIONS GAUGING, DONT GAUGE THIS POSITION
4297-E P-233
5 Perform a similar operation to make the touch probe contact position 2 and position 3 (positions
2 and 3 in the guide diagram).
[Supplement]
1) At positions 1 and 2, gauging is executed on one internal face, and at position 3, gauging is
executed on the other internal face that is parallel to the first internal face.
2) To execute this gauging operation by bringing the touch probe into contact with the external
faces at two points, skip the contact at position 2 (TOUCH POS 2).
When positions 2 and 3 are set, the cursor moves to CENTER POS.
EIOEMR5S4061R01
The following comment is displayed

PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4297-E P-234
The data is automatically displayed for CENTER POS, distance between end faces (L) and
inclination angle (b), then the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET NO..
EIOEMR5S4062R01
The data for each item is obtained in the manner indicated below.
CENTER POS:
The center position between positions 1 and 3 is calculated

assuming that the end faces are parallel to each other.
Distance between end faces (L): The distance between two end faces in the right angle direction to the faces is calculated assuming that the inclined face
gauged at positions 1 and 2 and the other face gauged at
position 3 are parallel with each other.
The angle made between the inclined face gauged at positions 1 and 2, and the X-axis is calculated.

4297-E P-235
key.
The input number is displayed at ZERO OFFSET NO. and the cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET data position.
EIOEMR5S4063R01

8 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the center position between two end faces in the new
coordinate system and press the WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S4064R01
4297-E P-236
This completes the external face center gauging (3-point contact mode) operation.
4-5-4. Gauging only Two Points in 3-Point Contact Mode
Eeoemr5s4024
To obtain the center position by bringing the touch probe into contact only at two
points after selecting the 3-point contact mode, the operation procedure differs from the normal gauging operation in
the following points.
Selection of an axis is necessary.
Contact detection is not carried out at position 2 but must be carried out at positions 1 and 3.
Center position, distance between end faces and inclination angle are calculated as indicated below.
Center position:
The center between positions 1 and 3
Distance between end faces (L): Distance between positions 1 and 3

If X-axis is selected for AXIS SELECT, this angle is 90.

If Y-axis is selected for AXIS SELECT, this angle is 0.
[Supplement]
To execute gauging only at two points although the 3-point contact mode is selected, no data must
be displayed for TOUCH POS 2 (immediately after the data is cleared or the start of this gauging
operation).
For details of operation, refer to [4-5-3. External Face Center Gauging in 3-point Contact Mode].
4297-E P-237
4-6.
Inclination and Corner Gauging

Eeoemr5s4025
This function is used to determine the zero point on the X- and Y-axis for workpieces
that are not
mounted parallel to these axes.
Note that although the zero offset is automatically executed for the X- and Y-axis, zero offset for inclination is not carried out automatically and therefore the data must be reflected to the part program
as necessary.
Procedure :
EIOEMR5S4065R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-238
2 Press function key [F2] (INCLINE, CORNER).
The WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen is displayed.
EIOEMR5S4066R01

SELECT CORNER BY CURSOR AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON
3 Select the corner where gauging is to be executed from GAUGING CORNER (A, B, C, D) as
instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key.
The colors of the arrow symbol, and the related number and corner name automatically
change.
EIOEMR5S4067R01
4297-E P-239
The direction of gauging at a contact detection position differs depending on the selected corner as shown below.
GAUGING CORNER
Contact Position 1
Contact Position 2
Contact Position 3
CORNER A
Y+
Y+
X+
CORNER B
Y+
Y+
X-
CORNER C
Y-
Y-
X-
CORNER D
Y-
Y-
X+
The cursor moves to TOUCH POS 1.
EIOEMR5S4068R01

MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON
4 Bring the touch probe into contact with the workpiece at position 1 (position 1 in the guide diagram) using the pulse handle as instructed by the comment.
Feed the touch probe with the x1 multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.
The corner position in the presently selected coordinate system is displayed and the cursor
4297-E P-240
6 Execute gauging at contact positions 2 and 3 (positions 2 and 3 in the guide drawing) using the
same operation.
The cursor moves to CORNER POS/ANG.
EIOEMR5S4069R01

PRESS WRITE BUTTON
The data of the corner, and the angle, are automatically displayed and the cursor moves to
ZERO OFST NO.
EIOEMR5S4070R01

4297-E P-241
key.
The data of TOUCH POS, CORNER POS/ANG, ZERO OFST NO. and ACT POSIT, with
the exception of angle , are updated to the coordinate values in the set coordinate system.
9 When the zero offset number is set, the cursor moves to CORNER SET.
EIOEMR5S4071R01

WRITE THE CORNER POSITION OF THE NEW COORDINATE
10 Input the X and Y coordinate values of the corner in the new coordinate system and press the
WRITE key.
The cursor moves to ZERO OFFSET.
EIOEMR5S4072R01
4297-E P-242
PRESS WRITE BUTTON
The data of TOUCH POS, CORNER POS/ANG, ZERO OFST NO. and ACT POSIT is
automatically updated and the cursor returns to GAUGING CORNER.
EIOEMR5S4073R01
This completes the inclination/corner gauging operation.

[Supplement]
1) The function assumes that angles at a corner (A, B, C, D) are right angles.
2) The angle value () is the angle made between the X-axis and the line defined by contact detection positions 1 and 2.
3) The angle value () displayed at of CAL. RESULT is registered in system common variables VS65.
4) The value set for VS65 cannot be directly displayed on the screen. It is cleared when the power
is turned off.
To check the value set for VS65 or to retain the value after turning the power off, perform the following steps.
4297-E P-243
Procedure :
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Input VC=VS65.
Input a normal common variable number for .
4 Press the CYCLE START button.
The value set for VS65 is set at VC.
Once the value is set for a common variable, the value can be checked by displaying the
parameter setting screen.
NOTICE
In a program, specify the commands like G11 P=VC.
4297-E P-244
5.
Tool Length Gauging

The tool length gauging function is used to set the tool length offset data.
Eeoemr5s4026
Procedure :
1 In the state the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed, press function key [F2] (TOOL
LENGTH GAUGING).
For the procedure for displaying the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, refer to [2. Basic
Operation].
The TOOL LENGTH GAUGING screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4074R01
[Supplement]
WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER BY SET AND START ATC 1 CYCLE
2 Input the tool number of the tool to be gauged to NEXT TOOL and press the WRITE key as
instructed by the comment.
4297-E P-245
3 Press the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel to mount the tool to be gauged
in the spindle.
The tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle is displayed at ACT TOOL.
EIOEMR5S4075R01
The cursor moves to TOOL-L OFST NO. and the following comment is displayed.
WRITE THE TOOL LENGTH OFFSET NUMBER
4 Input the tool length offset number as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to TOOL-L OFFSET.
EIOEMR5S4076R01

MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON.
4297-E P-246
5 Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor, as instructed by the comment, by operating
the pulse handle.
Move the tool with the x1 multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.
The tool length offset data is displayed.
This completes the tool length gauging operation when the tool offset data of other tools is not
measured.
To execute the tool length gauging cycle for other tools, proceed to the next step.
7 Move the cursor to ACT TOOL.
8 Input the tool number to ACT TOOL and press the WRITE key.
The cursor moves to POT NO. and the following comment is displayed.
WRITE THE RETURN DESTINATION POT NUMBER BY SET ( WHEN NOT SET)
9 Input the return tool pot number or as instructed by the comment and press the WRITE key.
When the return pot number is set, pressing the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel causes the tool to be returned to the specified pot.
If an attempt is made to call another tool by setting its number at NEXT TOOL while a return
pot number is set at POT NO., an alarm occurs and the following alarm message is displayed
on the screen.
5266 Pot command exist.
To avoid this, input for POT NO. and press the WRITE key. This causes NA to be set for
POT NO., allowing the next tool set for NEXT TOOL to be called.
After calling the next tool, repeat steps 4) to 9) for all tools for which the tool length offset data
should be set.
4297-E P-247
6.
Cutter Radius Gauging

Eeoemr5s4027
The cutter radius gauging function is used to set the cutter radius compensation
data.
Procedure :
1 In the state the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen is displayed, press function key [F3] (CUTTER RADIUS).
For the procedure for displaying the MANUAL GAUGING MENU screen, refer to [2. Basic
Operation].
The CUTTER RAD GAUGING screen, shown below, will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S4077R01
[Supplement]
4297-E P-248
2 Select the direction of gauging (+X, -X, +Y, -Y) by moving the cursor to the desired choice, as
instructed by the comment, and press the WRITE key.
-Y
+X
-X
+Y
EIOEMR5S4078R01
Fig.5-1 Selecting the Gauging Axis

The cursor moves to NEXT TOOL and the following message is displayed.
WRITE THE NEXT GAUGING TOOL NUMBER BY SET AND START ATC 1 CYCLE
3 Input the tool number of the tool to be gauged at NEXT TOOL and press the WRITE key as
instructed by the comment.
4 Press the [1 CYCLE START] button on the ATC operation panel to mount the tool to be gauged
in the spindle.
5 The spindle is orientated.
The cursor moves to CUTR-R COMP NO. and the following comment is displayed.
WRITE THE CUTTER RADIUS COMPENSATION NUMBER
6 Input the cutter radius compensation number as instructed by the comment and press the
WRITE key.
The cursor moves to CUTR-R COMP.
EIOEMR5S4079R01

MAKE A TOUCH AND PRESS WRITE BUTTON.
4297-E P-249
7 Bring the tool into contact with the touch sensor as instructed by the comment by operating the
pulse handle.
Move the tool with the x1 multiplication ratio setting for contact detection.
The cutter radius compensation data is displayed.
This completes the cutter radius gauging operation when the cutter radius compensation data
of other tools is not measured.
9 To execute the cutter radius gauging cycle for other tools, repeat the gauging operation steps
indicated above for all tools for which the cutter radius compensation data is to be set.
This completes the cutter radius gauging operation.
For the procedure for setting "ACT TOOL" and "POT NO." refer to [5. Tool Length Gauging].
4297-E P-250
7.
Comparison and Calculation of Gauging Results

In conventional gauging operation, absolute gauging results are obtained inEeoemr5s4028
the work coordinate
system currently selected. The new manual gauging function allows gauging results to be saved
using the data transfer function and to perform gauging while comparing and calculating gauging
results of various gauging cycles.
Any combination of gauging cycles, for example INCLINE, CORNER and INT END CENTER, ID
GAUGING and OD GAUGING, and others, is allowed as long as the results of gauging (to be
explained later) remain on the WORK GAUGING screen. It is also possible to display the results of
comparison/calculation (angle, distance, coordinate value, etc.) WORK GAUGING screens.
EIOEMR5S4080R01
7-1.
Transferring Gauging Results

The procedure for transferring results of gauging after the completion ofEeoemr5s4029
a gauging cycle is
described below.
Procedure :
1 After the completion of a work gauging cycle, press function key [F7] (TRANSFER) on the
WORK GAUGING screen.
A comment such as the one indicated below will be displayed.
INT CENTER (H0) X162.475 INT CENTER (H0) Y147.078 INT CENTER 45.000 THESE
ARE PREVIOUS GAUGING RESULTS WHICH RESULT DO YOU TRANSFER?
The term such as INT CENTER given in the comment represents the mode of the gauging
cycle that was executed to obtain the result.
INT CENTER (H0) X162.475 in the comment shown in the example screen above means that
the data that was transferred is the X-axis gauging result obtained in the internal face center
gauging operation and that the value is 162.475 in the machine coordinate system (H0).
The comment displayed on the screen includes one of the following terms, which indicate the
gauging mode used.
END FACE: Data transferre as the result of end face gauging operation
INSIDE DIA: Data transferred as the result of the I.D. gauging operation
4297-E P-251
OUTSIDE DIA: Data transferred as the result of the O.D. gauging operation
INT CENTER: Data transferred as the result of the internal end face center gauging
operation
EXT CENTER: Data transferred as the result of the external end face center gauging
operation
CORNER: Data transferred as the result of inclination/corner gauging operation
[Supplement]
The X and Y data, among the transferred data, are coordinate values in the machine coordinate system (H0).
Data represents an angle value.
2 In this state, select the data to be transferred by pressing the corresponding function key.
[F1] POSIT: Transfers the position data.
[F2] ANGLE: Transfers the angle data.
[F3] POSIT & ANGLE: Transfers the position and angle data.
If no data is to be transferred, press function key [F8] (CANCEL).
If any of function keys [F1] (POSIT), [F2] (ANGLE) and [F3] (POSIT & ANGLE) is pressed, the
corresponding data obtained in the latest gauging cycle is transferred and stored in the CNC
memory.
The actual data to be transferred depends on the executed work gauging cycle. See the table
below for the relationship between a work gauging cycle and the data to be transferred.
Work Gauging Cycle
Transferred Data with [F1]
Transferred Data with [F2]
End face gauging (X, Y, Z)
End face position
I.D. center
I.D. center position
O.D. center
O.D. center position
Center between two internal faces

(2-point contact mode)
Center position between

two internal faces
(only for the selected axis)
Center between two internal faces


two internal faces
End face angle
Center between two external faces


two external faces
(only for the selected axis)
Center between two external faces


two external faces
End face angle
Inclination/corner
Corner position
Workpiece angle
If function key [F3] (POSIT & ANGLE) is pressed, both the kinds of data selected by [F1]
(POSIT) and [F2] (ANGLE) are transferred.
If any of these function keys ([F1], [F2], [F3]) is pressed before a gauging cycle is completed,
no data is transferred and the following comment is displayed on the screen. The previous
transferred data remains.
NO GAUGING RESULT! CONTINUE GAUGING
3 If the comment indicated above is displayed, press function key [F8] (CANCEL).
This cancels data transfer mode and allows the operation to be continued.
4297-E P-252
7-2.
Comparison with Gauging Data

Data obtained in other gauging cycles is converted into the values in a pseudoEeoemr5s4030
local coordinate system on the basis of the transferred data. Angle, distance, and coordinate values (with reference to
the zero point in the local coordinate system) are displayed on each WORK GAUGING screen.
Note that calculation results may not be calculated and displayed depending on the type of gauging
operation, as indicated in the table below.
Gauging Operation
Calculation
End face gauging
I.D. center
O.D. center
Center between two internal

faces (2 points)
Center between two internal

faces (3 points)
Center between two external

faces (2 points)
Center between two external

faces (3 points)
Inclination/corner
{: Calculation results are displayed.

: Calculation results are not displayed.
7-3.
Example of Calculation Results Display

Eeoemr5s4031
How the calculation results are displayed is described below.
Assume workpiece A shown below is set on the table with a certain angle to the machine coordinate
system. The following is the procedure to obtain the distance between the reference corner position
and the center of hole a, and coordinate values of the center of hole a in the xy coordinate system (pseudo local coordinate system).
ym
Hole "a"
Workpiece A
y
x
75
150
Reference corner position
xm
(xm, ym)........Machine coordinate system

(x, y).............Pseudo local coordinate system
EIOEMR5S4081R01
4297-E P-253
Procedure :
1 At the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen, select A for the gauging corner.
2 Bring the touch probe into contact with workpiece A at TOUCH POS 1, TOUCH POS 2, and
TOUCH POS 3 in this order and obtain corner position data and inclination.
3 Press function key [F7] (TRANSFER) on the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen
to transfer corner position data and the inclination obtained in step 1).
THESE ARE PREVIOUS GAUGING RESULTS WHICH RESULT DO YOU TRANSFER?
4 Press function key [F3] (POSIT & ANGLE).
The corner position data and inclination angle of the workpiece are transferred.
Assume that the X- and Y- coordinate values and inclination of corner transferred as an example are x0, y0, 0, respectively, in the machine coordinate system (H0).
ym
Workpiece A
A
y0
X- and Y-coordinate values of corner

A are (x0, y0).
H(0)X...................x0
H(0)Y...................y0
Inclination angle..0
x0
xm
EIOEMR5S4082R01
Fig.5-2 Inclination and Corner Gauging

5 Close the WORK GAUGING 6. INCLINE, CORNER screen once and open the WORK GAUGING 2. I.D. CENTER screen.
6 Set the touch probe inside hole a and bring it into contact with the hole I.D. at TOUCH POS 1,
TOUCH POS 2, TOUCH POS 3, and TOUCH POS 4 to set the contact position data.
7 Make sure that the cursor is at CENTER POS/RAD (the cursor automatically moves to CENTER POS/RAD when data is set at TOUCH POS 4), then press the WRITE key.
The center position (xt, yt) and the diameter (D) are calculated and displayed.
ym
Hole "a"
yt
D
Workpiece A
xt
xm
EIOEMR5S4083R01
Fig.5-3 I.D. Center Gauging
4297-E P-254
The X- and Y-coordinate values (xt, yt) of the center of hole a will be displayed at the calculation result display area on the screen. These coordinate values are calculated on the basis of
the corner position data (x0, y0) transferred in step 5) above and are expressed as coordinate
values in the local coordinate system (x, y) which is obtained by rotating the machine coordinate system (xm, ym) by transferred angle data .
The distance to the center calculated in the I.D. gauging is obtained at the same time and displayed on the screen.
ym
Hole "a"
Workpiece A
x
75
150
Rotation by
y0
Reference corner position

0
x0
xm
EIOEMR5S4084R01
Fig.5-4 Local Coordinate System after Comparison/Calculation

The calculation result display area shows the following data.
CAL. RESULT X: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole a
along the X-axis in the local coordinate system (x, y).
CAL. RESULT Y: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole a
along the Y-axis in the local coordinate system (x, y).
CAL. RESULT L: The distance between the reference point (x0, y0) and the center of hole a.
CAL. RESULT : The angle formed between the X-axis and segment L in the local coordinate
system.
NOTICE
Angle displayed at CAL. RESULT is completely different from angle which is obtained in
gauging operation and is transferred.
4297-E P-255
8.
Error List
Error No.
Cutter R. comp input NO.
2713
Description
Eeoemr5s4032
This error occurs in any of the following cases.

(1) The designated cutter radius compensation number is 0 or
smaller, or greater than the number of compensation pairs
selected as the machine specification.
a.
Tool data 300-pair specification: The input number is greater

than 301.
b.

than 201.
c.

than 101.
(2) The cutter radius compensation number has not been designated when cutter radius compensation data should be designated.
Zero set input NO.
2714

(1) The designated zero offset number is 0 or smaller, or greater
than the number of work coordinate system number selected as
the machine specification.
a.
Work coordinate 100-pair system specification:

The input zero offset number is greater than 101.
b.

c.

(2) The zero offset number has not been designated when zero offset data should be designated.
Tool length offset input NO. This error occurs in any of the following cases.
2715
(1) The designated tool length offset number is 0 or smaller, or
greater than the number of tool length offset pair selected as the
machine specification.
a.

than 301.
b.

than 201.
c.

than 101.
(2) The tool length offset number has not been designated when tool
length offset data should be designated.
4297-E P-256
Error No.
Set data limit over
2716
Description
This error occurs in any of the following cases (Items 3 and 4 apply
when the interactive gauging function is used).
(1) When designating the REF ring diameter, the input data is outside the range 0 to 1000.000.
(2) When designating the reference tool diameter, the input data is
outside the range 0 to 1000.000.
(3) When designating the Z-axis upward stroke for OD gauging
mode, the input data is outside the range 0 to 2000.000.
(4) When designating the maximum contact detection stroke, the
input data is outside the range 0 to 2000.000.
Data set not ready

2718

(1) In the work gauging mode (1. X, Y, Z, END FACE), an attempt is
made to designate a zero offset value while the reference surface
position has not been obtained.
(2) In the work gauging mode (2. I.D. CENTER, 3. O.D. CENTER),
an attempt is made to designate zero offset data while the center
position has not been obtained.
(3) In the work gauging mode (4. INT END CENTER, 5. EXT END
CENTER), an attempt is made to designate zero offset data
while the center position has not been obtained.
(4) In the work gauging mode (6. INCLINE, CORNER), an attempt is
made to designate zero offset data while the corner position and
inclination angle have not been obtained.
4297-E P-257
SECTION 6 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION
SECTION 6
1.
INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION
Specifications
Zero point setting and tool offset setting are carried out using the touch probe Eeoemr5s5001
or touch sensor. Differing from conventional automatic gauging and automatic tool gauging functions, the operator can
carry out the gauging operations in the manual mode using the switches following the guide messages displayed on the screen. Therefore, the operator does not have to master special gauging
programs.
This function allows you easy and quick data setting without referring to the programming manual,
and can be effectively used for:
(1) Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining one-of-a-kind workpiece.
(2) Setting the zero point or the tool length offset data for machining the first workpiece and beginning production from the next workpiece using the set data.
(3) Setting the zero point or the tool offset data when performing machining jobs by interrupting lot
production using the same part program.
WORK
GAUGING
TOOL
GAUGING
-BLOCK
MODE
GAUGING
CYCLE
MODE
+BLOCK
MODE
TOUCH
SIGNAL
AUTO
MODE
INTERACTIVE GAUGING
Interactive gauging
effective/ineffective
switch
+BLOCK MODE selection

button
-BLOCK MODE selection

button
AUTO MODE selection button
Operation guide lamps
TOUCH SIGNAL lamp
WORK GAUGING/
TOOL GAUGING switch
Interactive gauging effective/

ineffective switch
INTERACT. GAUGING - TOOL

LENGTH GAUGING Screen
INTERACT. GAUGING WORK GAUGING Screen
PREPARATION (TOOL
LENGTH) Screen
PARAMETER (TOOL
LENGTH) Screen
REF TOOL
REF FACE 0
REF TOOL
REFERENCE
SURFACE SET
Screen
WORK GAUGING
Screen
PREPARATION
(WORK) Screen
REF FACE 0
TOUCH PROBE
LENGTH OFFSET
Screen
TOUCH PROBE
RADIUS COMP Screen
INCLINE, CORNER Screen
EXT END CENTER Screen
INT END CENTER Screen
O.D. CENTER Screen
I.D. CENTER Screen
2.
X, Y, Z END FACE Screen
4297-E P-258
List of Display Screen

Eeoemr5s5002
EIOEMR5S5001R01
4297-E P-259
3.
Switches
3-1.
Main Operation Panel

Eeoemr5s5003
(1) Interactive gauging

effective/ineffective switch
(2) WORK GAUGING/TOOL GAUGING switch
INTERACTIVE GAUGING
GAUGING
WORK
GAUGING
(3) TOUCH SIGNAL lamp
TOUCH
SIGNAL
(4) Operation guide lamps
(7) +BLOCK MODE selection button
CYCLE
MODE
TOOL
GAUGING
+BLOCK
MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
AUTO
MODE
(6) -BLOCK MODE selection

button
(5) AUTO MODE selection button

EIOEMR5S5002R01
(1) INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel

This operation panel is specific to the interactive gauging cycle. For details, refer to Section 3-2.
(2) CYCLE START button
Pressing this button starts the gauging cycle. After selecting the +BLOCK MODE, -BLOCK
MODE or AUTO MODE on the interactive gauging operation panel, press the CYCLE START
button.
(3) SLIDE HOLD button
Pressing this button temporarily stops the gauging operation. All types of manual operations
such as axis feed using the pulse handle or rapid feed function, or spindle release operation are
possible even when this button is pressed.
(4) FEEDRATE (%) switch
The axis feedrate of gauging operation can be changed as needed using this switch. The feedrate does not affect the gauging accuracy.
(5) AXIS SELECT keys
These keys are used to select the axis along which the gauging operation is executed. Select
X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
4297-E P-260
(6) RAPID OVERRIDE
For axis movement which is free of interference in such as axis return motion after the completion of gauging, the axes are fed at a rapid feedrate. Select the proper feedrate using this rotary
switch.
If the switch is set at 0% position, the cycle is suspended. Use the switch in the range of 10 to
100%.
(7) EMG. STOP button
Press this button to stop the machine in case of emergency.
(8) RESET key
Use this key to cancel the previous key operations. If a wrong pushbutton switch has been
pressed on the interactive gauging operation panel (1), wrong switch or key on the NC operation panel (10) has been pressed, or a wrong function key (11) has been pressed, press the
RESET switch.
It is also possible to stop and reset the gauging cycle by pressing this key while the gauging
cycle which has been started by pressing the CYCLE START pushbutton switch (2) is being
executed.
(9) Display Screen
The display screen displays gauging menus with graphic display and guide messages.
(10) NC Operation Panel
During gauging operation, the status indicating lamp RUN lights. Select the desired gauging
menu screen using the cursor control keys [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ].
(11) Function keys
Operation functions displayed at the bottom line of the display screen can be selected by pressing the corresponding function keys. When the function key is pressed, the display screen is
switched or the data setting operation is enabled.
4297-E P-261
3-2.
Interactive Gauging Operation Panel

Eeoemr5s5004

INTERACTIVE GAUGING
GAUGING
WORK
GAUGING
TOUCH
SIGNAL
CYCLE
MODE
TOOL
GAUGING
+BLOCK
MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
AUTO
MODE

button

EIOEMR5S5002R01
(1) Interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch

This switch is operative when the MANUAL key on the NC operation panel is pressed.
When this switch is placed at GAUGING position, the display screen displays the INTERACT.
GAUGING screen.
(2) Work gauging/tool length gauging switch
When this switch is placed at WORK GAUGING position, the WORK GAUGING screen is displayed. In the same manner, when this switch is placed at TOOL GAUGING position, the TOOL
LENGTH GAUGING screen is displayed.
(3) Touch signal lamp
This lamp lights when the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch is placed at GAUGING
mode and the touch probe or touch sensor contacts the workpiece or tool.
These lamps flicker when the selected cycle is effective. According to the selection status,
either one lamp or more than one lamp blinks.
When any of (5), (6), and (7) is selected, the lamp above the selected button stays lit.
Automatic gauging cycle, which is stored in advance, is called. In the case, direction of axis
motion is not restricted.
(6) -BLOCK MODE selection button
The gauging cycle in which the spindle moves only in the negative direction is called.
The gauging cycle in which the spindle moves only in the positive direction is called.
4297-E P-262
4.
Terminology
Eeoemr5s5005
RUN
SLIDE
HOLD
S.T.M
PROGRAM
STOP
LIMIT
ALARM
AUTO
MDI
O
V
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
"
MANUAL EDIT AUX PARAMETER ZERO SET TOOL DATA
&
I/
T
:
HT
M
;
DEL
E
^
<
7 8 9 /
4 5 6 *
1 2 3 +
0 . = -
MacMan
CAPS
LOCK
N SP
]
U
>
,
CTRL
UPPER
CASE
BS
CAN
WRITE
F8
EIOEMR5S5003R01
(1) SET
Sets the entered data as new data. To issue the SET command, press the function key [F1]
(SET), enter required data through the keyboard, and then press the WRITE key.
Data cannot be set until the WRITE key is pressed.
(2) CAL
Sets the data obtained by adding or subtracting the entered data to or from the preset value as
new data. To issue the CAL command, press the function key [F3] (CAL), enter required data
through the keyboard, and then press the WRITE key.
Data cannot be set until the WRITE key is pressed.
(3) BACKUP
Data such as tool length offset, origin of work coordinate system, and parameters (except system parameters) are stored in the memory at regular intervals as backup data. Therefore, if you
turn off the power right after you change these data, they may remain unchanged. To change
the data securely, execute the BACKUP command by pressing the function key [F7] (BACKUP)
before turning off the power.
(4) ZERO OFFSET NO. 10 (for system)
This offset number is used to register the touch sensor position (setting of the REF surface) as
the preparatory step for the gauging operation. This offset number cannot be used in usual
machining program. It is not possible to change the number by moving the cursor on the
screen.
(5) TOOL LENGTH OFFSET NO. 5 (for system)
This offset number is used as the tool offset number special to the touch probe as the preparatory step for the gauging operation. It is not possible to change the number by moving the cursor on the screen.
(6) REF RING CENTER HS3
This is the coordinate system used to obtain the center of the REF ring for the touch probe
diameter compensation as the preparatory step for the gauging operation. It is not possible to
change the coordinate system number by moving the cursor on the screen.
4297-E P-263
(7) Relative Offset
The reference tool length is taken as "0" and tool offset is made based on the difference
between the length of the tool in question and the reference tool length.
(8) Absolute Offset
Length of each tool is input directly and tool offset made based on the input length.
The reference tool length is: 150 mm (5.91 in.) for NT No. 40 and 200 mm (7 .87 in.) for NT No.
50.
(9) H.P. SET (ATC home position setting)
This is effective only for vertical machining centers.
The tool change position for tool length gauging cycle is set. After bringing the tool to the position where the ATC operation can be conducted safely, press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET).
The position is registered as the ATC home position.
The auto cycle for the tool length gauging is effective only after the home position has been set.
Once set, the home position remains effective until the power is turned off.
The set home position is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, it is necessary to set the
home position after turning on the power.
4297-E P-264
5.
Basic Operation
Eeoemr5s5006
Because the manual gauging is carried out in the manual operation mode, all types
of manual operations such as rapid feed, cutting feed and pulse handle feed are possible during the execution of
manual gauging. Therefore, feed the touch probe or touch sensor manually until it is brought near
the contact point.
When bringing the touch sensor or touch probe into contact with the object, select the -SINGLE,
+SINGLE, or AUTO by using the buttons on the specially prepared INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel and press the CYCLE START button. The slide hold and override functions are effective
in this automatic touch detection cycle.
In the slide hold mode, manual feed is also possible; to restart the automatic cycle operation, press
the CYCLE START.
The lamps above these cycle selection buttons flicker when the corresponding cycle is selectable.
When the cycle is selected from those indicated by the flickering lamps, the lamp corresponding to
the selected cycle stays lit and other lamps go off. Pressing the CYCLE START button under such
condition can begin the selected cycle.
Procedure :
1 Press the MANUAL key on the NC operation panel to select the manual operation mode.
2 Place the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch at GAUGING position.
This establishes the interactive gauging mode. Switching between WORK GAUGING mode
and TOOL GAUGING mode is done using the work gauging/tool length gauging switch on the
INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel.

INTERACTIVE GAUGING
GAUGING
WORK
GAUGING
TOUCH
SIGNAL
CYCLE
MODE
TOOL
GAUGING
+BLOCK
MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
AUTO
MODE

button

EIOEMR5S5002R01
4297-E P-265
6.
Outline of Interactive Gauging Function

Eeoemr5s5007
The interactive gauging function includes the following specification. For general
specifications,
refer to Section 2, "LIST OF DISPLAY SCREEN".
(1) Work Gauging Function
This is the function to carry out the zero offset using the touch probe. This function provides the
following five gauging function to meet variety of workpiece shape:
1. X, Y, Z END FACE
2. I.D. CENTER
3. O.D. CENTER
4. INT END CENTER
5. EXT END CENTER
6. INCLINE, CORNER
EIOEMR5S5004R01
Before carrying out the work gauging function, always carry out the gauging PREPARATION
(WORK) and PARAMETER (WORK).
4297-E P-266
(2) Tool Length Gauging Function
This is the function to carry out the tool length offset using the touch sensor.
To carry out this function, a reference tool or a tool for which the length between the gauge line
and the tool nose is known is used as the "gauge".
For the offset data, two types of offset data are available - relative offset data and absolute offset data. The relative tool offset data uses the difference in lengths between the reference tool
and a tool in question.
The absolute tool offset data uses the length of the tool in question between the gauge line and
the tool nose.
EIOEMR5S5005R01
(Relative Offset)
(Absolute Offset)
Reference tool
Gauge line
L
L
Value "L" is registered as the tool length offset data
Value "L" is registered as the tool length offset data

EIOEMR5S5006R01
Before carrying out the tool length gauging, always carry out the preparation for tool length
gauging and set the gauging parameter data.
4297-E P-267
(3) Preparation for work gauging and setting the parameters
Before carrying out the work gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the data on the INTERACT.
GAUGING PREPARATION (WORK) screen and the INTERACT. GAUGING PARAMETER
(WORK) screen.
a) Preparatory step
EIOEMR5S5007R01
Before carrying out the work gauging function, it is necessary to set the tool offset data and
tool radius compensation (4 directions of +X, -X, +Y, -Y) data of the touch probe itself.
The touch probe length offset and radius compensation are required only when a touch
probe is changed or a touch probe has been struck against an obstacle.
b) Setting the gauging parameters
EIOEMR5S5008R01
4297-E P-268
Once set, the parameter setting remains effective until it is changed with new setting.
There are two types of work gauging parameters as indicated below:
Maximum travel to detect "touch" (MAX TRVL TO TOUCH)
The maximum travel of the touch probe to detect the "touch" automatically after manual
positioning at the automatic gauging cycle start position.
If the "touch" signal is not obtained after the touch probe movement exceeds the set distance, an alarm occurs and the touch probe returns to the start point.
Initial setting is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
Spindle retract stroke during OD gauging (SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING)
In the OD gauging mode, the spindle is retracted upward to prevent interference of the
touch probe with the workpiece.
Set this stroke for this parameter.
(4) Preparation for Tool Gauging and Setting the Parameters
Before carrying out the tool gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the data on the INTERACT.
GAUGING PREPARATION (TOOL LENGTH) screen and the INTERACT. GAUGING PARAMETER (TOOL LENGTH) screen.
a) Preparatory step
EIOEMR5S5040R01
Before carrying out the tool length gauging cycle, it is necessary to set the touch sensor
position and the reference tool length.
The touch sensor position is set for "HS1" of system work coordination zero (the coordinate
system specially used for the setting of the touch sensor position data and cannot be used
for machining). If the touch sensor is fixed, setting is required only once. However, if the
touch sensor position is changed, it is necessary to set the data again.
When "0" is set for REF TOOL LENGT, the relative tool length offset data is obtained and
when the length between the gauge line and the tool nose is set, the absolute tool length is
offset data is obtained.
Tool length of the reference tool which is supplied by Okuma is 150 mm (5.91 in.) for No. 40
taper and 200 mm (7.87 in.) for No. 50 taper.
4297-E P-269
b) Setting the gauging parameter
EIOEMR5S5010R01
Once set, the parameter setting remains effective until it is changed with new setting.
There are two types of tool length gauging parameters as indicated below:
Maximum travel to detect "touch" (MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH)
The maximum travel of the touch probe to detect the "touch" in the -BLOCK MODE after
manual positioning at the gauging cycle start position.
If the "touch" signal is not obtained after the touch probe movement exceeds the set distance, an alarm occurs and the touch probe returns to the start point.
4297-E P-270
Maximum tool length (MAX TOOL LENGTH)
Set the length of the longest tool that will be used in user's plant. The data to be set differs depending on whether the relative tool length offset data is to be used or the absolute tool length offset data is to be used.
The setting for this parameter determines the distance in which the tool advances to the
touch sensor at a rapid feedrate when the tool length offset data is read in the AUTO
mode after setting HP. Because the tool will be hit against the touch sensor if the setting
is too small, set the data taking safety into consideration.
HP position
Max. tool length +10 mm
Rapid feed
Cutting feed
Operation sequence
Touch sensor
Auto Mode Cycle
EIOEMR5S5011R01
CAUTION
If the maximum tool length is set to a value smaller than the actual tool length, the tool and
the touch sensor will collide.
Never set the maximum tool length shorter than the actual tool length.
4297-E P-271
7.
Work Gauging Function
7-1.
PARAMETER (WORK) Screen

Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5008
1 After selecting the MANUAL mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position,
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at WORK GAUGING position. The
screen indicated below is displayed.
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Press the function key [F8] (GAUGING PARAM). The screen below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5008R01
4297-E P-272
3 Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TRVL TO TOUCH L=. After inputting the value,
press the function key [F1] (SET).
4 Locate the cursor at the data SPIDL UP TRVL AT O.D. GAUGING. After entering the value,
press the function key [F1] (SET).
5 Press the function keys [F7] (BACKUP) and [F8] (CLOSE) in this order.
7-2.
PREPARATION (WORK) Screen

Prepare the followings:
- touch probe
- reference ring
- swing gauge
- reference block
- reference tool
Eeoemr5s5009
Procedure :
1 After selecting the MANUAL mode, place the interactive gauging switch on the interactive
gauging operation panel at GAUGING position, and then place the work gauging/tool length
gauging switch at WORK GAUGING position.
The screen as indicated below is displayed.
EIOEMR5S5004R01
4297-E P-273
2 Press the function key [F7] (GAUGING PREPARE). Screen below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5009R01
3 Locate the cursor at the data column of NXT TOOL and key in the reference tool registration
No.
Press the 1 CYCLE START key after moving the axes to the positions where the ATC operation is possible.
The reference tool is extracted from the ATC magazine and mounted to the spindle.
4 After the reference tool has been mounted to the spindle, manually bring the reference tool into
contact with the reference block.
Then, move the cursor to the data column of ZERO OFFSET Z.
5 When the cursor is moved to the data column of ZERO OFFSET Z, the message "Write the
REF block thickness" will be displayed on the screen. Key in the thickness (L) of reference
block.
4297-E P-274
6 Press the function key [F5] (NEXT). Screen below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5012R01
7 Locate the cursor at the data column of NXT TOOL and key-in the touch probe registration No.
Press the 1 CYCLE START key after moving the axes to the position where the ATC operation
is possible.
8 After the touch probe has been mounted to the spindle, locate the cursor at the data column of
TOOL LENGTH OFFSET.
9 After confirming that the message "Position near REF face and select cycle" is displayed on
the screen, manually move the touch probe close to the reference surface.
Press "Z" key to select Z-axis for gauging axis direction.
Press -BLOCK MODE key on the INTERACTIVE GAUGING operation panel and then press
the CYCLE START button.
The touch probe will start the automatic gauging cycle.
10 The tool offset values are entered when the touch prove contacts the reference surface.
4297-E P-275
11 Press the function key [F5] (NEXT). This will display screen below.
EIOEMR5S5013R01
12 Fix the reference ring on the table.

13 Locate the cursor at the data column of REF RING DIA D and key-in the ring diameter.
14 After the completion of operation in step (13), the message "Find the ref ring center and press
WRITE button at that pos" is displayed on the screen. The cursor will advance to the data column of REF RING CENTER.
15 Manually remove the touch probe from the spindle and press the swing gauge against the spindle.
Leave marking on the touch probe to confirm the correct phase alignment with the drive key
before removing the touch probe from the spindle.
16 Obtain the center of the reference ring by manually moving the swing gauge and align the center of reference ring and spindle center.
Swing gauge
Datum ring
Table
EIOEMR5S5014R01
4297-E P-276
Press the WRITE key at that position. The values for ZERO OFFSET NO. 3 (for system) (X, Y)
will be changed and the cursor will advance to the data column of RAD COMP.
EIOEMR5S5015R01
17 While maintaining the X and Y axes at the center of the reference ring, retract the Z-axis.
Remove the swing gauge from the spindle and mount the touch probe to the spindle while
aligning the match mark with the drive key.
Then, manually carry out spindle orientation. If the touch probe radius compensation is carried
out without carrying out spindle orientation, a gauging error might be caused.
18 Lower Z-axis until the touch probe tip will come into the reference ring. Press "X" key to select
X-axis, and press AUTO MODE button and CYCLE START button in this order.
4297-E P-277
19 The touch probe will execute the automatic gauging cycle and the values for RAD COMP 1, 2,
3 and 4 will be entered.
EIOEMR5S5007R01
2
2
5
4
Solid line : Cutting feed

Broken line: Rapid feed
Automatic Gauging Cycle of Touch Probe

EIOEMR5S5016R01
20 Pressing the function keys [F7] (BACKUP) and [F8] (CLOSE) in this order will return the screen
to the WORK GAUGING MENU screen.
4297-E P-278
7-3.
X, Y, Z END FACE
Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5010
1 After selecting the MANUAL mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position,
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at WORK GAUGING position.
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Locate the cursor at "1. X, Y, Z END FACE" on the MENU screen above and press the WRITE
key. Screen below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5017R01
4297-E P-279
3 Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate No.).
The work coordinate No. can be selected irrespective of the work coordinate No. currently
effective.
4 After the completion of operation in step 3, the zero offset values of the selected coordinate
system and the actual position values in the selected coordinate system will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5018R01
5 Move the touch probe close to the gauging position.

6 Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out by pressing any of the AXIS
SELECT keys.
When the axis is selected, the cursor will advance to the data column of the selected axis of
ZERO OFFSET.
7 The indicating lamps of +BLOCK MODE and -BLOCK MODE flicker.
4297-E P-280
Select the direction in which the touch probe is moved. The indicating lamp of the direction
selected will continue flickering, while the lamp of the direction not selected will stop flickering.
INTERACTIVE GAUGING
GAUGING
WORK
GAUGING
TOUCH
SIGNAL
CYCLE
MODE
TOOL
GAUGING
+BLOCK
MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
AUTO
MODE

button

EIOEMR5S5002R01
8 Pressing the CYCLE START button starts the automatic gauging cycle in the selected direction.
9 The touch probe moves at the speed determined by the cutting override switch setting until it
will contact the workpiece.
10 After the touch probe has contacted the workpiece, it will once retract for 0.5 mm from the
workpiece and then contact the workpiece again. The speed at which this motion is conducted
is constant disregarding the cutting override switch setting.
11 After the second contact, the touch probe returns to the previous gauging position.
12 The zero offset data is changed; zero offset is carried out automatically so that the coordinate
value of the contact position will be "0".
13 To set the zero offset data so that the contact position coordinate values will be other than "0",
select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key and the cursor moves to the data area of the
selected axis. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.
4297-E P-281
[Supplement]
1) When a wrong operation mode has been selected +BLOCK MODE, -BLOCK MODE or wrong
zero offset data has been entered, press either the function key [F7] (QUIT) or RESET key.
2) An alarm, indicating the gauging cycle is not possible, is lit in the following cases:
- The contact is not detected within the distance set for a parameter.
- The CYCLE START switch is pressed after selecting the +BLOCK MODE or -BLOCK MODE
with the pulse handle selected.
Press the RESET key to cancel the alarm state.
3) The direction in which an axis moves in the automatic cycle coincides with the direction of the
axis selected using the AXIS SELECT key.
If a wrong axis is selected, the touch sensor will not move in the required direction.
For ID or OD gauging, select the X-axis for automatic mode.
The cursor on the screen moves to the axis which is selected using the AXIS SELECT key.
That is, when X-axis is selected, the cursor moves to the X-axis data column of ZERO OFFSET.
AXIS SELECT
X
PULSE
HANDLE
EIOEMR5S5020R01
EIOEMR5S5018R01
When the PULSE HANDLE is selected using the AXIS SELECT key, the cursor on the screen is
cleared; if the gauging cycle is started under such condition, an alarm occurs.
4297-E P-282
7-4.
I.D. CENTER
Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5011
1 After selecting the manual mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position,
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Locate the cursor at the data column of "2. I.D. CENTER" on the above screen and press the
WRITE key.
Screen below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5021R01
4297-E P-283
4 The indicating lamps of +BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE flicker.
5 The message "Position near end-face, select axis, then select cycle" will be displayed on the
screen.
Feed the touch probe manually to the following position and then feed it into the hole.
AUTO MODE
.... Near the center of the hole
+BLOCK MODE
.... Near the wall of the hole in the +X-axis direction
[Supplement]
Selection of the AUTO MODE and +BLOCK MODE should be made according to the ID
dimension.
AUTO MODE ......... The ID is 2 x max. travel or less to touch.
+BLOCK MODE ...... The ID is greater than 2 x max. travel to touch.
The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
Change the setting as needed.
6 AUTO MODE
When the AUTO MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of AUTO MODE will continue flickering.
Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button.
The gauging cycle starts and gauging is carried out in the sequence of X-axis, Y-axis, and Xaxis. Finally, the touch probe stops at the center of the hole and the gauging cycle is completed. The zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of
the center of the hole will be (0, 0).
7 +BLOCK MODE
When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue
flickering.
+BLOCK
MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
AUTO
EIOEMR5S5022R01
(1) Feed the touch probe manually close to point "1" as illustrated below and insert it into the
hole.
Y
Manual feed
X
2
EIOEMR5S5023R01
4297-E P-284
(2) Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button.
(3) The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the positive direction of X-axis and
after the detection of "contact", it returns to the previously located position.
(4) The indicating lamp of AUTO MODE continues flickering, while the indicating lamp of
+BLOCK MODE stops flickering.
(5) Manually feed the touch probe close to point "2" as shown in (1).
In this axis movement, move only X-axis and do not move Y-axis. If Y-axis is moved, the
results of the gauging cycle are not correct.
(6) Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the cycle start switch.
+BLOCK
MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
AUTO
EIOEMR5S5024R01
(7) The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the negative direction of X-axis and
after the detection of "contact", it moves to the center position. Then, the cycle is continuously carried out in the order of Y-axis and X-axis. Finally, the touch probe stops at the
center of the hole.
After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that
the X and Y coordinate values of the center of the hole will be (0, 0). At the same time,
the ID measurement is also displayed.
(8) When zero offset is required so that the coordinate values of the obtained center of the
hole will be other than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor
moves to the data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key
[F3] (CAL) and enter the required value.
4297-E P-285
7-5.
O.D. CENTER
Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5012
Screen as indicated below will be displayed.
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Locate the cursor at the data column of "3. O.D. CENTER" on the above screen ad press the
WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S5025R01
4297-E P-286
4 The indicating lamp of -BLOCK MODE will flicker.
5 Manually move the touch probe to the position "1" of the drawing below.
Y
Manual feed
X
2
EIOEMR5S5026R01
After the positioning of the X- and Y-axes, move the touch probe down; the infeed amount ("A"
in drawing above) must be smaller than the spindle retract stroke set for SPIDL UP TRVL AT
O.D. GAUGING.
6 Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the -BLOCK MODE and press the
CYCLE START button.
7 The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the negative direction of X-axis and after
the detection of "contact", it returns to the previously located position and then the Z-axis
moves upward.
The Z-axis upward movement amount is as the amount set for SPIDLE UP TRVL AT O.D.
GAUGING. The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm. Change the setting when needed.
8 Manually move the touch probe close to position "2" in drawing in 5. In this axis movement,
move only X-axis and do not move Y-axis. If Y-axis is moved, the results obtained in the gauging cycle will not be correct.
9 Select the X-axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the AUTO MODE and press the CYCLE
START button.
10 The gauging cycle starts; the touch probe moves in the positive direction of X-axis and after the
detection of "contact", the Z-axis moves upward and then to the center of the OD.
The gauging is carried out in the sequence of Y-axis and X-axis while Z-axis moves upward
and downward. Finally the touch probe stops at the center of the hole.
The zero offset of X- and Y-axes is carried out so that the X and Y coordinate values of the
center of the hole will be (0, 0).
At the same time, the OD measurement is also displayed.
11 When zero offset is required so that the coordinate values of the obtained center of the hole will
be other than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data
area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the
required value.
4297-E P-287
7-6.
INT END CENTER

Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5013
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Locate the cursor at "4. INT END CENTER" on the above screen and press the WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S5027R01
4297-E P-288
4 The indicating lamps of +BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE will flicker.
5 The message "Position near end-face, select axis, then select cycle" will be displayed on the
screen.
Feed the touch probe manually to the following position and then feed it into the groove.
AUTO MODE
.... Near the center of the internal end face
+BLOCK MODE
.... Near the wall of the groove in the positive direction of the selected axis
[Supplement]
Selection of the AUTO MODE and +BLOCK MODE should be made according to the internal
end face dimension.
AUTO MODE ........ When the internal end face is 2 x max. travel or less to touch.
+BLOCK MODE ..... When the internal end face is greater than 2 x max. travel to touch.
The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.). Change the setting as needed.
6 AUTO MODE
When AUTO MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of AUTO MODE will continue flickering.
Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out using the AXIS SELECT key and
press the CYCLE START button.
The gauging cycle starts. The zero offset is carried out so that the coordinate value of the center of the internal end face will be "0".
1
Manual
feed
X
2
Y-axis zero offset
X-axis zero offset

EIOEMR5S5028R01
4297-E P-289
7 +BLOCK MODE
When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will continue
flickering.When the +BLOCK MODE is selected, the indicating lamp of +BLOCK MODE will
continue flickering.
(1) Move the touch probe manually close to point "1" as illustrated below and insert it into
the groove.
EIOEMR5S5029R01
(2) Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key and press the CYCLE START button.
(3) The gauging cycle starts. After the completion of gauging, the touch probe returns to the
previously located position.
(4) Move the touch probe close to the opposite wall of the groove.
(5) Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the -BLOCK MODE and press the
CYCLE START button.
After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of the axis gauged is carried out so that
the coordinate value of the center will be "0". At the same time, the internal end face
dimension (width between walls) is also displayed.
(6) When zero offset is required so that the coordinate value of the obtained center will be
other than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the
data area of the corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL)
and enter the required value.
[Supplement]
In this example, the -BLOCK MODE cycle is carried out after the completion of the +BLOCK
MODE cycle. The operation in the reverse order is also possible.
4297-E P-290
7-7.
EXT END CENTER

Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5014
1 After selecting the manual mode, place the interactive gauging switch at GAUGING position
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Locate the cursor at "5. EXT END CENTER" on the above screen and press the WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S5030R01
4297-E P-291
4 The indicating lamp of -BLOCk MODE will flicker.
5 Manually move the touch probe to the position "1" of the drawing below.
After the positioning of the X- and Y-axes, move the touch probe down; this infeed amount ("A"
in drawing above) must be smaller than the spindle retract stroke set for SPIDL UP TRVL AT
O.D. GAUGING.
1
Y-axis zero offset
X-axis zero offset
X
A
EIOEMR5S5031R01
6 Select an axis along which the gauging cycle is carried out by pressing any of the AXIS
SELECT keys.
Press the -BLOCK MODE button and the CYCLE START button.
7 The gauging cycle starts. After the completion of gauging, the touch probe returns to the previously located position.
8 Manually move the touch probe close to the opposite side wall.
9 Select an axis using the AXIS SELECT key, select the +BLOCK MODE and press the CYCLE
START button.
After the completion of gauging, the zero offset of the axis gauged is carried out so that the
coordinate value of the center will be "0". At the same time, the external end face dimension is
also displayed.
10 When zero offset is required so that the coordinate value of the obtained center will be other
than "0", select the axis using the AXIS SELECT key. The cursor moves to the data area of the
corresponding axis on the screen. Press the function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the required
value.
4297-E P-292
[Supplement]
In this example, the -BLOCK MODE cycle is carries out after the completion of the +BLOCK MODE
cycle. The operation in the reverse order is also possible.
Select "5. EXT END CENTER" for the case indicated below where the touch probe is brought into
contact twice in the same direction.
EIOEMR5S5032R01
4297-E P-293
7-8.
INCLINE, CORNER
Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5015
1 Select the "MAN. OPERATION" mode. Set the interactive gauging effective/ineffective switch
on the interactive gauging operation panel to "GAUGING".
Set the WORK GAUGING/TOOL GAUGING switch to "WORK GAUGING". The following
screen appears.
EIOEMR5S5004R01
2 Locate the cursor at "6. INCLINE, CORNER" on the above MENU screen and press the
WRITE key to display the screen below.
EIOEMR5S5033R01
4297-E P-294
3 Enter the ZERO OFFSET NO. (work coordinate system No.) and press the WRITE key.
EIOEMR5S5034R01
4 According to the message "1 Position near end-face and select cycle", manually move the
probe close to the position "1" on the screen and select "+BLOCK MODE". Then, press the
CYCLE START button.
5 On completion the gauging cycle, the probe returns to the original position. The gauged value
obtained at this time is not displayed on the screen.
probe close to the position "2" on the screen and select "+BLOCK MODE". Then, press the
CYCLE START button.
probe close to the position "3" on the screen. Select "+BLOCK MODE" in the case of corner
position A and "-BLOCK MODE" in the case of B. Then, press the CYCLE START button.
4297-E P-295
8 On completion of the gauging cycle, corner position and angle are automatically displayed.
EIOEMR5S5035R01
9 After gauging operation, press [F8] (CLOSE) to return to the initial screen.
[Supplement]
The angle obtained through the gauging operation will be registered at the system common variable VS65.
The value at VS65 cannot be checked on the display screen and will be lost when the power is
turned off. (a) to check the value or (b) to retain the value even with the power off, follow the steps
below.
1) Press the MDI key to select the MDI operation mode.
2) Enter VC{{=VS65 through the keyboard.
3) Press the CYCLE START button.
The value at VS65 is entered to VC{{.
Here, VC{{ is a general-use common variable and its value can be checked on the PARAMETER SET screen.
NOTICE
Create a program as follows:
:
G11 P=VC{{
:
4297-E P-296
8.
Tool Length Gauging
8-1.
Parameter (Tool Length)

Procedure :
Eeoemr5s5016
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at TOOL GAUGING position.
EIOEMR5S5005R01
2 Press the function key [F3] (GAUGING PARAM).

EIOEMR5S5010R01
4297-E P-297
3 Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH L= and press the function
key [F1] (SET). Enter the value.
4 Locate the cursor at the data column of MAX TOOL LENGTH and press the function key [F1]
(SET). Enter the value.
8-2.
Preparation (Tool Length)

Prepare the followings:
- small dia. drill
- reference tool
Eeoemr5s5017
Procedure :
and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at TOOL GAUGING position.
EIOEMR5S5005R01
4297-E P-298
2 After confirming that the message "Write the next gauging tool number and start ATC 1
CYCLE" is displayed on the above screen, press the function key [F1] (SET) and key-in the
registration No. of the small dia. drill. (This operation is necessary to align the center of the drill
tool (X-, Y-axes) and the center of the touch sensor.)
EIOEMR5S5041R01
3 Press the 1 CYCLE START key and mount the small dia. drill to the spindle.
4 Align the center of the drill (X-, Y-axes) and the center of the touch sensor. (by eye measure
allowed)
5 Press the function key [F2] (GAUGING PREPARE).
6 Locate the cursor at the data column of ZERO OFFSET X and press the WRITE key.
The zero offset for X-axis will be executed.
7 Locate the cursor at the data column of ZERO OFFSET Y and press the WRITE key.
The zero offset for Y-axis will be executed.
8 Move Z-axis upward while holding X- and Y-axis at that position, and remove the small dia. drill
in the spindle and mount the reference tool instead.
4297-E P-299
9 Manually move the Z-axis downward and locate the reference tool close to the touch sensor.
The distance between the reference tool and the touch sensor must be smaller than the value
set for MAX TRAVEL TO TOUCH L.
The initial setting for this parameter is 50 mm (1.97 in.).
EIOEMR5S5036R01
10 After pressing the -BLOCK MODE key, select Z-axis by pressing the AXIS SELECT key.
Then, press the CYCLE START button.
11 The gauging cycle starts. After the reference tool has contacted the touch probe, the reference
tool returns to the previously located position.
13 Move the Z-axis upward. Manually remove the reference tool from the spindle and mount the
small dia. drill instead.
14 Move the spindle to the position where ATC operation is possible (Z-axis ... plus limit, Y- and Zaxis ... position which is free of interference) and press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET). This
position is set as the home position for tool change operation.
15 Press the 1 CYCLE START key without setting the data for next tool. The small dia. drill will be
returned to the ATC magazine.
16 To proceed with the tool length gauging cycle, key-in the registration No. of the tool at NXT
TOOL and carry out the 1 CYCLE START function.
4297-E P-300
8-3.
Tool Length Gauging

The tool length gauging cycle consists of the two modes - -BLOCK MODE andEeoemr5s5018
AUTO MODE.
-BLOCk MODE
.... The gauging cycle is carried out after a cutting tool is positioned above
the touch sensor manually. In this mode, only Z-axis is controlled and
after the detection of "contact", the cutting tool returns to the previously
located position.
AUTO MODE
.... The cycle is enabled after the HP (ATC position for interactive gauging
operation) has been set. The cutting tool is positioned automatically at
a position above the touch sensor and then the Z-axis moves down
until the "contact" is detected.
After the detection of "contact", the cutting tool returns to the HP position.
For both the -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE, select Z-axis using the AXIS SELECT
key.
Use these modes to measure the tool length of a boring bar, face milling cutter, end mill and other
types of cutting tools which do not have the cutting tip at the center of the tool because manual operation (spindle free, manual pulse feed, rapid feed) is allowed during slide hold mode.
To restart the operation after activating the slide hold function, press the CYCLE START button.
Procedure :
1 After selecting the manual mode, place the interactive gauging switch at the GAUGING position, and then place the work gauging/tool length gauging switch at the TOOL GAUGING position.
EIOEMR5S5005R01
2 The cursor is located at the data column of NXT TOOL. After keying-in the registration No. of
the tool to be gauged, press the 1 CYCLE START key.
4297-E P-301
3 The cursor moves to the data column of TOOL-L OFST NO. Enter the tool length offset number.
EIOEMR5S5037R01
4 When the tool offset number is entered, the -BLOCK MODE and AUTO MODE indicating
lamps will light up.
5 The cursor moves to the data column of TOOL-L OFFSET.
6 -BLOCK MODE
EIOEMR5S5038R01
(a) Manually move the cutting tool above the touch sensor and select Z-axis with the AXIS
SELECT key.
4297-E P-302
(b) Press the -BLOCK MODE switch and then the CYCLE START button.
(c) When the cutting tool is brought into contact with the touch sensor, the tool length offset
value is displayed automatically and the Z-axis moves up.
7 AUTO MODE
(a) Press the AUTO MODE switch and the CYCLE START button. The cutting tool begins
moving from the HP (home position) automatically until it is brought into contact with the
touch sensor.
(b) Upon contact with the touch sensor, the tool length offset data is automatically displayed.
(c) The cutting tool returns to the HP automatically.
[Supplement]
Setting the HP
After positioning the cutting tool at a position (X, Y, Z) where interference will not occur when
the ATC cycle is carried out, press the function key [F4] (H.P. SET).
Because the set HP is lost when the power is turned off, it in necessary to set the HP each
time the power is turned on.
4297-E P-303
9.
Other Supplementary Explanations

When the work gauging cycle is carried out, zero point is automatically offsetEeoemr5s5019
at the completion of
the cycle. However, if automatic zero offsetting is not required and only the work gauging should be
carried out, set "0" for bit 7 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46. Initial setting is "1" when the
machine is shipped.
EIOEMR5S5038R01
For carrying out the tool length gauging cycle, this manual assumes that all tools are stored in the
tool magazine and that the tool for which the tool gauging cycle is to be carried out is set in the spindle in the automatic tool change cycle. In other word, the required tool is set in the spindle by carrying out the automatic tool change cycle after entering the corresponding tool number for NXT TOOL.
If the tool to be gauged is set in the spindle by hand instead of using the ATC, and if that tool is
returned to the tool magazine using the ATC, enter the tool number of manually set tool for ACT
TOOL. To return the tool to the required pot in the tool magazine, enter the pot number at POT NO.
before starting the ATC cycle. If the tool may be returned to any pot, carry out the ATC cycle without
designation the return pot number.
In this case, the tool is returned to an empty pot automatically.
(1) NC parameters
a) Set whether or not the automatic zero setting is carried out when the work gauging cycle is
carried out.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 7
1
: Automatic zero setting is carried out.
: Only gauging is carried out.
b) Set whether only the automatic cycle is effective or both the automatic and block cycles are
effective at the start of the work gauging cycle.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 46, bit 6
1 : Both the block and automatic modes are effective.
0 : Only the automatic mode is effective.
4297-E P-304
+ BLOCK MODE
-BLOCK MODE
AUTO MODE
X, Y, Z END FACE
I.D. CENTER
O.D. CENTER
(First in the + BLOCK

MODE, then in the
AUTO MODE)
INT END CENTER
EXT END CENTER
: Effective regardless of parameter setting (the indicating lamp flickers.)
: Effective when designated with a parameter.
: Ineffective
c) Set the unit system used for the display and parameter setting.
NC optional parameter bit No. 9
Bit No.
0
Contents
In data setting, unit system of length is either
"inch" or "mm".
In data setting unit is either minimum setting unit or
1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec.
SET 1
SET 0
Factory Set Initial Value
Inch
mm
1 mm,
1 inch,
1 deg,
1 sec
Minimum
setting
unit
6
7
In the data setting, the decimal point indicates 1

mm, 1 inch, 1 deg.
Basic
unit
bit 1
setting
0
0
INTERACT.
GAUGING TOOL LENGTH
GAUGING Screen
INTERACT.
GAUGING WORK GAUGING
MENU Screen
1
0
TOOL LENGTH
GAUGING Screen
INCKINE,
CORNER Screen
EXT END CENTER

Screen
INT END CENTER

Screen
O.D. CENTER
Screen
Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch sensor to position "2". Then, carry out the
AUTO MODE cycle.
Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the
+BLOCk MODE cycle, manually move the touch prober close to position "2".
Then, carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the inside diameter which
is smaller than two times the maximum travel to detect "contact".
AUTO MODE
HP Setting
-BLOCK MODE
-BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE
Manual Feed
+BLOCK MODE
+BLOCK MODE
Manual Feed
Manual Feed
+BLOCK MODE
-BLOCK MODE
Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" and carry out the +BLOCK MODE cycle.
Next, move the probe close to position "2" and carry out BLOCk MODE cycle again. Then,
move the probe manually close to position "3" and carry out -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK
MODE cycle.
Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch sensor to position "2". Then, carry out the
+BLOCK MODE cycle.
Move the touch probe manually close to position "1" in the illustration. After carrying out the
+BLOCK MODE cycle, manually move the touch probe close to position "2".
Then carry out the -BLOCK MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the width between the
AUTO MODE
AUTO MODE
AUTO MODE
Move the touch probe manually close to the center of the hole and carry out the AUTO MODE
cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the inside diameter which is smaller than the maximum
travel to detect "contact".
Move the touch probe manually close to (within the maximum travel to detect "contact") the
workpiece. Then, carry out the -BLOCK MODE or +BLOCK MODE cycle.
+BLOCK MODE
Manual Feed
Manual Feed
Manual Feed
+BLOCK
MODE
Move the touch probe manually close to the center of the groove (between the walls) and
carry out the AUTO MODE cycle. Use this cycle for gauging the width between the
walls whose distance is smaller than two times the maximum distance to detect "contact".
or
AUTO MODE
-BLOCK MODE
+BLOCK MODE
AUTO MODE
-BLOCK
MODE
Eeoemr5s5020
After moving the cutting tool close to (within the maximum travel to detect "contact") the touch
sensor, carry out the -BLOCK MODE cycle.
Move the cutting tool manually to a position where interference will not occur when the ATC
cycle is carried out. Set the home position at this position and carry out the AUTO cycle.
After the tool length gauging cycle is carried out, the cutting tool returns to the home position;
this completes the cycle. The set home position remains effective until the power is turned off.
10.
I.D. CENTER
Screen
X, Y, Z END
FACE Screen
4297-E P-305
Operation Flow
EIOEMR5S5039R01
4297-E P-306
11.
Error List
No.
Error Message Contents
Eeoemr5s5021
Cutter R. comp input (1) The designated cutter radius compensation number is "0" or smaller, or
NO.
greater than the number of compensation pairs selected with user's
2713
specification.
a.
Tool data 300-pair specification

The input number is greater than 301.
b.

c.

(2) The cutter radius compensation number has not been designated when
the cutter radius compensation data should be designated.
Zero set input NO.
2714
(1) The designated zero offset number is "0" or smaller, or greater than the
number of work coordinate system number selected with user's specification.
a.
Work coordinate 100-pair system specification

b.

c.

(2) The zero offset number has not been designated when the zero offset
data should be designated.
Tool length offset
input NO.
2715
(1) The designated tool length offset number is "0" or smaller, or greater
than the number of tool length offset pair selected with user's specification.
a.

b.

c.

(2) The tool length offset number has not been designated when the tool
length offset data should be designated.
Set data limit over
2716
(1) When designating the REF ring diameter, the input data is outside the
range of 0 to 1000.000.
(2) When designating the reference tool diameter, the input data is outside
the range of 0 to 1000.000.
(3) When designating the Z-axis upward stroke for OD gauging mode, the
input data is outside the range of 0 to 2000.000.
(4) When designating the maximum contact detection stroke, the input
data is outside the range of 0 to 2000.000.
Note: Causes (3) and (4) above apply when the interactive gauging function
is used.
4297-E P-307
No.
Data set not ready
2718
Error Message Contents

(1) In the work gauging mode (1. X, Y, Z, END FACE), an attempt is made
to designate a zero offset value while the reference surface position
has not been obtained.
(2) In the work gauging mode (2. I.D. CENTER, 3. O.D. CENTER), an
attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the center position has not been obtained.
(3) In the work gauging mode (4. INT END CENTER, 5. EXT END CENTER), an attempt is made to designate a zero offset data while the center position has not been obtained.
(4) In the work gauging mode (6. INCLINE, CORNER), an attempt is made
to designate a zero offset data while the corner position and inclination
angle have not been obtained.
4297-E P-308
SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION
SECTION 7
1.
NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION

FUNCTION
What is Non-contact Sensor?

Eeoemr5s6001
The non-contact sensor uses a laser beam for measurement unlike existing sensors
with mechanical or electric contacts. This optical sensor, by taking advantages of a non-contact sensor, can
gauge even a rotating tool, which used to be impossible for the existing sensors. The sensor can
increase the gauging speed, and can gauge sphericity by taking the advantage of a linear sensor.
However, the bloom sensor in tended for linear gauging can not gauge the maximum length (or
radial) of an irregular shaped tool depending on the sensor position. Scanning gauging* makes up
this disadvantage. This gauging method permits gauging of a rotating tool or gauging while searching the maximum length.
EIOEMR5S6001R01
* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis)and shifts
along the axis at right angles with the gauging axis (e.g. the Z-axis). By repeating the above
gauging several times, the sensor determines the maximum tool length (or diameter).
4297-E P-309
2.
Outline
Eeoemr5s6002
Non-contact sensor gauging is roughly classified into two methods according to
the position wherethe sensor is installed: gauging with a fixed sensor and gauging with a movable one. A fixed sensor
can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool). But a movable sensor can gauge only a
vertical spindle tool.
Movable sensor
for gauging a vertical spindle tool or horizontal spindle tool
Fixed sensor

for gauging a vertical spindle tool
EIOEMR5S6002R01
The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable VFST.
Bit 3 of VFST
......
Movable sensor
......
Fixed sensor
The tool-gauging program consists of the following maker's subprograms:

Preparation program for gauging
Gauging program
Tool breakage detection program
Programs classified by the sensor position are described on the following pages.
4297-E P-310
3.
Maker's Subprogram in the Movable Sensor Mode

As mentioned earlier, the sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bitEeoemr5s6003
3 of the system-variable VFST. When selecting the movable sensor mode, turn off bit 3 of the variable.
EIOEMR5S6003R01
When using a movable sensor, the sensor position can be set with bits 0 and 1 of NC optional
parameter No. 72. Four positions are available as shown in the figure below, and the moving axis
and the approach direction are different among the four positions.
2
Y+
3
X+
Default position
EIOEMR5S6009R01
Sensor
position
NC optional parameter bit No. 72
Approach direction
Bit 1
Bit 0
Negative X-axis direction Positive X-axis direction
Negative Y-axis direction Positive Y-axis direction
Positive X-axis direction Negative X-axis direction
Positive Y-axis direction Negative Y-axis direction
4297-E P-311
[List of gauging preparation cycle]
OO31
Position setting cycle for tool change
OO33
Position setting cycle for Y-axis retract
OO93
Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction
OO94
Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction
[List of gauging cycle]

OO95
Gauging in the lengthwise direction
OO96
Gauging in the radial direction
OO99
Gauging the sphericity
[List of tool breakage detection cycle]

OO95
Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction
OO96
Tool breakage detection in the radial direction
OO97
High-speed tool breakage detection
[Tool change position setting cycle (OO31)]

On the machine of which tool change function is set at ON (bit 0 of NC specification code
No.21 is turned on), the NC performs tool change by transferringtheargumentPGO=2 on
detection of tool breakage. The cycle sets the tool change position used for that purpose.
The tool change position is stored in the system-work coordinates No.2.
For details, refer to Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET / AUTOMATIC TOOL
BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION.
CALL OO31
[Y-axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)]
In some machines, the sensor may interfere with the Y-axis when it advances or retracts.
If interference is anticipated, move the Y-axis to its retract position before advancing or retracting the sensor. If necessary, refer to Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET /
AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION.
CALL OO33
[Spindle speed]
When performing gauging while rotating the spindle, specify the spindle speed by referring to
the speed obtained by the following formula:
S=F/N
Here,
S means the actual spindle speed. This is the S command value multiplied by the spindle
speed override.
F is the actual feedrate. If PFI (the 1st approach speed of the sensor) is not specified with an
argument, this value is 2,000 multiplied by the cutting feedrate override. If PFI is specified with
an argument, this value is the specified value multiplied by the cutting feedrate override.
N is the number of tool blades.
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO93)]
This cycle determines the sensor position used to gauge the tool length and detect tool breakage.
The offset method can be switched by bit 7 of VFST.
Bit 7 of VFST
OFF : Relatively position offset

ON
: Absolutely position offset
Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here. The gauging results are
stored in the system-work coordinates No.20.
4297-E P-312
Calling sequence
CALL OO93
PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]

[PAT=*]
[PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis, bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis)
When the sensor position is 0 or 2, set PAXI at #06H. When a movable sensor is
used, the sensor and the tool may interfere with each other and the machine will
consequently get damaged if the Y-axis position is not set.
When the sensor position is 1 or 3, set PAXI at #05H. When a movable sensor is
used, the sensor and the tool may interfere with each other and the machine will
consequently get damaged if the X-axis position is not set.
PLI: Reference tool length
For the absolute position offset (as mentioned earlier), specify the length from
the gauge line to the end of the reference tool. For the relative position offset,
specify the difference between the reference tool length for relative position offset and the reference tool length used for individual gauging. If they are the
same, just specify 0.
PRS: Spindle orientation position
If PRS is omitted and an M code for spindle rotation (M03 or M04) is specified,
the tool is measured while in rotation. When PRS is specified, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped tool. With out the above M
code, however, the spindle is orient-stopped and the sensor gauges the stopped
tool even if PRS is omitted.
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
Specify the width of gauging in one direction. In scanning gauging, the sensor
measures the tool in both positive and negative directions. Without designation
of PSPN, the sensor cannot gauge the tool. The default pick feed for gauging is
0.1 mm (0.004 in.). Scanning gauging is in tended for determining the maximum
tool length position.
When the measured value decreased, it is assumed that the subsequent gauging data will no more in crease. This means the sensor does not need to continue gauging before it covers the width of PSPN. The criterion for stopping
gauging is called skip value. The default is 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.).
4297-E P-313
PUDT: Under-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.))
POVT: Over-travel amount in the first approach. (Default: 50 mm (1.97 in.))
PAT: Attachment offset number
Set the offset amount to VATSC [185, attachment offset number].Use this number
when performing the sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. The movable
sensor cannot gauge a horizontal tool. Therefore, this number applies only to the
gauging on extension attachments.
PCON: Z-axis retraction inhibiting parameter*
Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging cycle
is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify "1" for PCON.
PRET: Sensor retraction inhibiting parameter*
Usually the sensor retracts after gauging. To hold the sensor position after gauging,
specify "1" for PRET.
* When"1"is set at the Z-axis retract inhibiting parameter, "1"is automatically set
also at the sensor retraction inhibiting parameter. This is because the sensor interferes with a machine component when it advances or retracts depending on the
axis position or the machine.
PF1: 1st approach speed of the sensor
PF2: 2nd approach speed of the sensor
PF3: 3rd approach speed of the sensor & 1st approach speed in scanning cycle
PF4: 4th approach speed of the sensor & 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle
Usually, the tool approaches the sensor four times. In scanning gauging, the tool
approaches the sensor twice. Here, specify the approach speed at that time. The
default speed is 2,000 mm/min, 1,000 mm/min, 100 mm/min, and 3 mm/min respectively. In the case of gauging of a rotating tool, the 4th approach speed depends on
rotation speed (0.001 x S [mm]/min).
PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow(3 [s]by default)
Gauging operation
1.
nstall the reference tool.
2.
Advance the sensor with M144. (Ensure that the sensor does not interfere with anything.)
3.
Turn on the laser with M375. (The laser is turned off by M374.)
4.
Locate the tool near the sensor by hand. (Locate the tool in a position where the sensor
works by Z-axis movement)
5.
Execute the sensor zero setting cycle in automatic or MDI operation mode.
4297-E P-314
Cycle operation
1.
The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.
2.
The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Yaxis before gauging.
3.
Spindle orientation is done except for gauging of rotating tool.
4.
The sensor advances.
5.
The Y-axis is positioned.
6.
The X-axis is positioned.
7.
The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.
8.
The laser shutter opens.
9.
Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)
10. The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

11. Scanning cycle starts if the cycle is selected.
12. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.*
13. The laser shutter closes.
14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*
15. The sensor retracts.*
*
Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No.12 is omitted when PCON is specified.
Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 and 15 is omitted when PRET is specified.
4297-E P-315
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO94)]
This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting tool
breakage.
The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.20.
Calling sequence
CALL OO94 PAXI=* PRI=* PLI=* [PIN=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*]
[POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: X-axis, bit1: Y-axis, and bit2: Z-axis)
When the sensor position is 0 or 2, set PAXI at #01H.
When the sensor position is 1 or 3, set PAXI at #02H.
PRI: Reference tool radial
Specify the cutter radius of the reference tool.
Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction.
PIN: Z-axis infeed amount
When the sensor zero setting cycle is executed, the sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with
PIN.
* Points to be noted in the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction
also apply to this parameter.
PF1: The 1st approach speed of the sensor
PF2: The 2nd approach speed of the sensor
PF3: The 3rd approach speed of the sensor & the 1st approach speed in scanning cycle
PF4: The 4th approach speed of the sensor & the 2nd approach speed in scanning cycle
PSBA: Dwelling time [s] for sensor air blow (3 [s] by default)
4297-E P-316
Gauging operation
1.
Install the reference tool.
2.
3.
4.
works by Y-axis or X-axis movement.
5.
Cycle operation
1.
2.
The sensor is positioned at the Y-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Yaxis before gauging.*3
3.
4.
5.
The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.*2
6.
The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.*2
7.
The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis
shifts from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
8.
9.
10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.*2

14. The Y-axis retracts if it is so designed.*, *3
*
*2 When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), the Y-axis moves
instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6 and 10, and the X-axis moves instead of Y-axis
in the above step 5.
*3 When the sensor position is 1 or 3 (for measurement in Y-axis direction), Y-axis retraction
does not take place.
4297-E P-317
[Gauging in the lengthwise direction]
This cycle gauges the tool length. When gauging the tool length, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
[PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*]
[PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the (expected) tool length.
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]:Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
An offset must be set at VATSC [185, attachment offset designation number]. Use
this setting for executing a sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment. It is also
necessary to match the attachment number with the attachment offset number. Set
attachment rotation offset numbers (G181 to G185) to the attachment in ascending
order.
Example:
T301: Offset number 1 (PAT = 1 at this time)
:
:
When a movable sensor is used, horizontal tools cannot be measured. In this case,
only gauging using an extension attachment is available.
PH: Tool length offset number
Specify the tool length offset number where the gauged tool length is stored.
When PH is omitted, the active tool offset number (VTLCN) is set.
4297-E P-318
PSAM: The number of gauging times.
If PSAM is set to 2 or more, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the set number of
times.
For the 1st gauging, the NC performs normal gauging (with 4 times of approach).
For the 2nd and later gauging cycles, the NC performs gauging by 2 times of
approach to the sensor. The approaching speeds in the 2nd and later gauging
cycles are as follows:
1st approach ... The 3rd approach speed in the normal gauging cycle
2nd approach ... The 4th approach speed in the normal gauging cycle
The average value obtained by several times of gauging is regarded as the finally
measured value.
The 2nd and later gauging cycles do not include the scanning gauging.
The default is 3 (times).
PSPR: Allowable difference between the maximum and the minimum measurements
The maximum and the minimum values are obtained from the results of several
times of gauging. Set the allowable range of the difference between the maximum
and minimum measurements (variation) at this parameter. The default is 0.005
[mm].
PSRA: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (alarm)
Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range causes an alarm or not.
Set "1" if you want an alarm to be generated. Set "0" if not. The default is "0" (no
alarm).
PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry).
Set whether the variation exceeding the allowable range triggers another gauging
cycle or not. When retry is desired, set the number of retry times at PRTY.
If retry is not desired, set "0" at PRTY.
The NC performs gauging by the number of times set at PSAM (number of gauging
times) for each retry gauging. During the retry gauging, two times of approach is
made even in the 1st gauging cycle.
If the variation does not fall within the allowable range after the specified number of
retrials, an alarm occurs.
If PSRA is set to "1", the PRTY value is ignored. If "0" is set at both PSRA and
PRTY, the average value is regarded as the measured value even when the variation is out of the allowable range. The default is "0" (no retry).
4297-E P-319
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.
6.
The X-axis is positioned at the sensor position.
7.
The sensor-air-blower is turned off.
8.
9.
The Z-axis moves to the sensor position.

11. In the case of several times of gauging, the NC repeats the gauging cycle by the specified
number of times.
*
4297-E P-320
[Gauging in the radial direction]
This cycle gauges the cutter radius. When gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
Calling sequence
CALL OO96 PRI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
[PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the offset amount of the tool length.
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the offset amount of the cutter radius (: the expected offset amount of the
cutter radius).
The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative
direction by a distance specified with PIN.
Refer to the [Gauging cycle in the lengthwise direction].
PD: Cutter radius compensation number
Specify the cutter radius compensation number where is stored the gauged cutter
radius.
When omitted, the active tool compensation number (VTLCN) is set.
PSAM: The number of gauging times
Refer to the [Gauging cycle in lengthwise direction].
PRTY: Action to be taken when the variation exceeds the allowable range (retry)
4297-E P-321
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position.*2
6.
The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.*2
7.
The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the sensor position
shift sin infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
8.
9.

number of times.
*
instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6, 10, 13, and the X-axis moves instead of Y-axis
4297-E P-322
[Gauging the sphericity (OO99)]
This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of ball end mill.
Calling sequence
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*] [PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PH: Tool management number
Specify the tool management number where the tool length offset amount and the
cutter radius compensation amount are stored for judgment of sphericity. When PH
is omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set.
PLI: Tool length
Specify the tool length. When omitted, the offset amount of the tool management
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the cutter radius. When omitted, the compensation amount of the tool management number is set.
PRA: The angle added for gauging sphericity
The sensor gauges the sphericity from the length wise direction to the radial direction.
Specify the incremental angle used for this gauging. The angle must be 5 or over
and a divisor of 90. Default is 15.
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning][Skip value in scanning]
PRE: Maximum allowable error
When the error in the sphericity gauging exceeds this amount, an alarm occurs.
When PRE is not specified, the cycle does not judge the errors.
4297-E P-323
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The X-axis is positioned.*2
7.
8.
Gauging cycle starts.(Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)
9.
The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.*2
10. The PRA angle is added and the sensor gauges sphericity in the slanting direction.
11. Operation sequences No.9 and 10 are repeated up to the gauging angle of 90.
12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.*2
13. The sensor gauges in the radial direction.
18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgement command is specified.
*
instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6, 9, 12 and step 10, and the X-axis moves
instead of Y-axis in the above step 5.
4297-E P-324
[Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction]
This cycle detect the tool breakage in the lengthwise direction. When the breakage detection
in the lengthwise direction, turnoff bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
[PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the tool length (: the expected tool length).
PSPN [PPIC] [PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning[Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
Specify the tool length offset number of which data is compared with the gauging
result.
When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is set.
PGO: Action to be taken on detection of tool breakage
PGO=1 The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage.
PGO=2 The tool is changed on detection of tool breakage. The broken tool moves
to the tool change position before being changed.
If PGO is omitted, the cycle ends with alarm occurrence.
PLE1: Threshold value for judging tool breakage
Specify the threshold value for judging tool breakage as a difference from the tool
offset value. Default is 0.1 mm (0.004 in.).
PLE2: Threshold value for judging tool wear
Specify the threshold value for judging tool wear as a difference from the tool offset
value. When the difference is less than PLE2, the NC judges that the tool is worn
and up dates the tool length offset amount. If PLE2 is omitted, the NC does not
make this judgment.
4297-E P-325
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
17. The tool breakage or the tool wear are judged.
18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool is changed according to the PGO setting.
*
4297-E P-326
[Tool breakage detection in the radial direction]
This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For the breakage detection in the
radial direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
Calling sequence
CALL OO96 [PRI=*] [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
[PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*] [PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
The cutter radius is compared with this value.
When omitted, the data of the active tool number (VTLCN) is set.
Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the tool
4297-E P-327
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in
infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
8.
9.
10. The X-axis moves to the sensor position.

number of times.
*
instead of the X-axis in the above steps 6, 10, 13, and the X-axis moves instead of Y-axis
4297-E P-328
[High-speed tool breakage detection]
This cycle detects the tool length breakage.The high-speed tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown in
the right figure.
This cycle, however, may not be able to detects light tool breakage.
EIOEMR5S6005R01
Calling sequence
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
Specify the tool length offset amount. When omitted, the value specified with the
offset number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
Specify the cutter radius compensation amount. When omitted, the value specified
with the offset number is set.
The sensor starts gauging by shifting from the starting position in the negative direction by a distance specified with PIN. (Default: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.))
PH: Tool offset number
Specify the tool off set number. When omitted, the active tool number (VTLCN) is
set.
4297-E P-329
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).*2

14. The tool breakage is judged.
*
instead of X-axis in the above steps 6 and 9, and the X-axis moves instead of Y-axis in the
above step 5.
4297-E P-330
4.
Maker's Subprogram in the Fixed Sensor Mode

Eeoemr5s6004
The sensor mode (fixed/movable) can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable
VFST. When
selecting the fixed sensor mode, turn on bit 3 of the variable.
A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool)or a vertical spindle tool. The
sensor mode (horizontal/vertical) can be switched by bit 6 of the system-variable VFST. For gauging
a horizontal spindle tool, turn on bit 6 of the variable.
The gauging cycles for vertical and horizontal spindle tools are described below:
EIOEMR5S6006R01
4297-E P-331
5.
Maker's Subprogram for Gauging a Vertical Spindle Tool

in the Fixed Sensor Mode
Eeoemr5s6005
Like the gauging program for the movable sensor, the program for gauging a vertical
spindle tool by
the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines:
OO31
OO33
Position setting cycle for Y- axis retract
OO93
Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction
OO94

OO95
Gauging in the length wise direction
OO96
OO99

OO95
Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction
OO96
OO97

Refer to "3. Maker's subprogram in the movable sensor mode" [Tool change position setting
cycle (OO31)].
[Y- axis retract position setting cycle (OO33)]
Refer to "3. Maker's subprogram in the movable sensor mode" [Y- axis retract position setting
cycle (OO33)]
[Spindlespeed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
F is the actual feedrate. If PFI (the 1st approach speed of the sensor)is not specified with an
Additionally, when PF1 is specified with an argument, this is a value calculated by multiplying
the commanded value by the cutting feedrate override.
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction (OO93)]
Bit 7 of VFST

ON
4297-E P-332
Calling sequence
CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*]
Normal setting data is PAXI=#04H.
Refer to 4. Maker's subprogram in the movable sensor mode.
Gauging operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locate the tool near the sensor by hand.(Locate the tool in a position where the sensor
5.
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

*
Positioning to the positive limit by the sequence No. 12 is omitted when PCON is specified.
4297-E P-333
breakage.
Calling sequence
[POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
Normal setting is #02H.
PRI: Reference cutter radius
Refer to "3. Maker's subprogram in the movable sensor mode".
Gauging operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
works by Y-axis movement)
5.
4297-E P-334
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.
6.
The X-axis moves to the under-travel position.
7.
shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
8.
9.
10. The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.

*
4297-E P-335
[Gauging in the length wise direction]
Calling sequence
PLI: Tool length
4297-E P-336
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-337
This cycle gauges the cutter radius. For gauging the cutter radius, turn on bit 0 of the systemvariable VFST.
Calling sequence
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
4297-E P-338
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-339
This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of a ball end mill.
Calling sequence
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PRET=*]
PH: Tool length offset number, Cutter radius compensation number
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
PRE: Detected error
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
12. The X-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.
18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgment command is specified.
*
4297-E P-340
[Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction]
This cycle detect the tool breakage in the length wise direction. For the breakage detection in
the lengthwise direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
4297-E P-341
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
17. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage or tool wear.
*
4297-E P-342
This cycle detects the tool breakage in the radial direction. For thebreakage detection in the
Calling sequence
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
4297-E P-343
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
18. When the tool breakage is detected, the tool breakage or the tool wear are judged.
*
4297-E P-344
The tool breakage is detected at high-speed.
Calling sequence
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.(When PIN is specified, the Z-axis shifts in
8.
9.
The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

14. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage.
*
4297-E P-345
6.
Maker's Subprogram for Gauging a Horizontal Spindle

Tool in the Fixed Sensor Mode
Eeoemr5s6006
The sensor mode (fixed/movable)can be switched by bit 3 of the system-variable
VFST. When
selecting the fixed sensor mode, turn on bit 3 of the variable.
A fixed sensor can gauge a horizontal spindle tool (an attachment tool)or a vertical spindle tool. The
sensor mode (horizontal/vertical) can be switched by bit 6 of the system-variable VFST. For gauging
a horizontal spindle tool, turn on bit 6 of the variable.
EIOEMR5S6007R01
Like the gauging cycles in the movable sensor mode, the horizontal tool gauging program in the
fixed sensor mode consists of the following sub routines:
OO31
OO32
Z- axis lowering position setting cycle
OO93
Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction
OO94

OO95
Gauging in the length wise direction
OO96
OO99

OO95
Tool breakage detection in the length wise direction
OO96
OO97

Refer to "3. Maker's subprogram in the movable sensor mode" [Tool change position setting
cycle (OO31)].
[Z- axis lowering position setting cycle (OO32)]
For the gauging on extension attachments, the Z-axis lowering position has to been specified.
This OO32 cycle set this position. Refer to Section 1. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET
/ AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION.
4297-E P-346
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the length wise direction (OO93)]
Bit 7 of VFST

ON
Calling sequence
CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
PAT=* [PRET=1] [PCON=1] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PAXI: Axis of which zero point is set (bit0: the X-axis,bit1: the Y-axis, bit2: Z-axis)
Normal setting data is PAXI=#02H.
Gauging operation
1.
Install the reference tool. Set the attachment direction to the right on the user's responsibility.
2.
3.
4.
works by Y-axis movement)
5.
4297-E P-347
Cycle operation
1.
2.
The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.
3.
4.
5.
The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position.
6.
The Y-axis moves to the under-travel position.
7.
8.
9.
The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.

11. The Y-axis is positioned at the Z-axis lowering position.
*
Sensor retraction by the sequence No.14 is omitted when PRET is specified.
4297-E P-348
This cycle determines the sensor position for gauging the cutter radius and detecting the tool
breakage. The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No.23.
Calling sequence
[POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PRI: Reference cutter radius
VEST: Sensor setting position
Gauging operation
1.
Install the reference tool. Set the attachment direction to the right on the user's responsibility.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4297-E P-349
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Yaxis shifts in infeed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
7.
8.
9.

*
4297-E P-350
[Gauging in the length wise direction]
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PAT: Attachment off set number
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Z-axis is positioned at the sensor position.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-351
Calling sequence
PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
PSPN [PPIC][PTOL]: Gauging width in scanning [Pick feed in scanning] [Skip value in scanning]
PIN: Y-axis infeed amount
4297-E P-352
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis shifts in
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-353
This cycle gauges the sphericity at the tip of a ball end mill.
Calling sequence
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*]
PH: Tool length offset number, Cutter radius compensation number
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
PRE: Detected error
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
12. The Y-axis and Z-axis move to the sensor position.
18. The sphericity is judged, if the judgment command is specified.
*
4297-E P-354
in the lengthwise direction, turn off bit 0 of the system-variable VFST.
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
4297-E P-355
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
16. The gauging result is judged to be tool breakage or tool wear.
*
4297-E P-356
Calling sequence
PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
4297-E P-357
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis is positioned at the shifting point from the sensor position by a distance specified with PIN.)
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
16. If the tool breakage is detected, the NC judges if the tool has been broken or worn.
17. If the judgment is tool breakage, the NC changes the tool according to the PGO setting.
*
4297-E P-358
The tool breakage is detected at high-speed.
Calling sequence
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned at the sensor position. (When PIN is specified, the Y-axis shifts in
in feed direction by a distance specified with PIN.)
7.
8.
The Z-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).
9.

*
4297-E P-359
7.
List of Alarms
2583
Alarm B UNTENDED: Large error in measurement of sphericity
Eeoemr5s6007
Large errors were detected in measurement of sphericity.

[Probable Faulty Locations]
In the sensor zero setting cycle, the sensor zero position in the horizontal direction did not
match the tool center.
Or, the measuring tool was defective.
[Measures to Take]
Use a proper tool, such as a spare tool.
2305
Alarm B UNTENDED: Measurement impossible

Measurement became impossible during auto gauging cycle.
For this gauging system, the following codes are added to this alarm:
6A
Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the first approach.
6B
Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach.
6C
Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the second approach.
6D
Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach.
6E
Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the third approach.
6F
Contact could not be confirmed in the third approach.
70
Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.
71
Contact could not be confirmed in the fourth approach.
72
Sensor 4 could not be confirmed in retraction of the skipping cycle.
73
Contact could not be confirmed in the first approach of the skipping cycle.
74
75
Contact could not be confirmed in the second approach of the skipping cycle.
7B
The first sensor could not be confirmed in the high-speed tool breakage detection
cycle.
7C
The sensor could not be confirmed after skipping in the high-speed tool breakage
detection cycle.
95
In the plural measurement operations, the difference between the minimum and
maximum measured values exceeded the tolerance.
96
The attachment type does not match the gauging program number.
30 angular AT OO125, OO126, OO127, and OO129 are usable.
Vertical/Horizontal spindles
In execution of OO95, OO96, OO97, or OO99, no attachment is
mounted, or the attachment is not extension one, 90 angular one, or
B-/C-axis one.
97
The attachment is not indexed to an angle where measurement is possible.

30 angular AT
Not indexed to C270
45 angular AT
Not indexed to C270
Vertical/Horizontal spindles 90 angular AT not indexed to C270
B-/C-axis AT indexed to B90 but not indexed to C270
99
The vertical/horizontal spindle tool command (bit 6 of VFST) is wrong.

"1" (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when no attachment was mounted or
an extension AT was mounted for vertical/horizontal spindle measurement.
Or, "0" (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when 90 angular AT or B-/C-axis
AT is mounted.
4297-E P-360
SECTION 8 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC
SECTION 8
1.
NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC

Eeoemr5s7001
EIOEMR5S7001R01
* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis) and shifts
4297-E P-361
2.
Outline
Eeoemr5s7002
the position wherethe sensor is installed: This gauging function is possible only with the fixed sensor type.
Y+
X+
Z+
EIOEMR5S7002R01
Bit 3 of VFST
...... Movable sensor
...... Fixed sensor

Gauging program
3.
Gauging with the Fixed Sensor

Movable sensor and fixed sensor can be switched with the setting at bit 3 ofEeoemr5s7003
the system variable
VFST. To select the fixed sensor, set ON the bit 3.
Perform this gauging by setting OFF the bit 6 of the system variable VFST.
EIOEMR5S7003R01
4297-E P-362
4.
Each Manufacturer's Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor

Eeoemr5s7004
The gauging subprogram for the fixed sensor consists of the following subroutines:
OO31
OO33
OO93
OO94

OO95
OO96
OO99

OO95
OO96
OO97

CALL OO31
CALL OO33
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
4297-E P-363
[B-axis positioning function]
This function moves the B-axis to the machine zero before execution of the program for each
gauging cycle. Use this function when interference is anticipated between the workpiece and
the sensor during gauging.
NC optional parameter No. 36 bit 5 (POSITIONING 1: DOES, 0: DOES NOT)
[Setting a barrier]
There is an area in which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is
attached to the spindle. A barrier must be set to avoid this.
For the setting of a barrier, see the attached manual "SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC."
Bit 7 of VFST

ON
Calling sequence
CALL 0093
PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]

Normal setting data is PAXI=#05H. In the case of movable sensor, however, set
the Y-axis position. Otherwise, the sensor interferes with the tool, damaging the
machine.
4297-E P-364

Gauging operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4297-E P-365
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The B-axis moves to the machine zero at the rapid traverse when "1" is set at bit 5 of NC
optional parameter No. 36.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Gauging cycle starts. (Sensor air blow is carried out for the 1st gauging.)
*
4297-E P-366
breakage.
Calling sequence
[POVT=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
Gauging operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
works by Y-axis movement.)
5.
4297-E P-367
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.
7.
The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.
8.
9.
11. The Y-axis moves to the sensor position.
*
4297-E P-368
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
times.
measured value.
[mm].
alarm).
4297-E P-369
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-370
Calling sequence
[PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
See the description of the zero setting cycle of the sensor for gauging in lengthwise
direction and the gauging cycle in lengthwise direction.
4297-E P-371
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
number of times.
*
4297-E P-372
Calling sequence
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PRET=*]
PH: Tool length offset, cutter radius compensation number
PLI: Tool length
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
4297-E P-373
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
*
4297-E P-374
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PGO: Parameter for designating the action when tool breakage is detected
4297-E P-375
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-376
Calling sequence
[PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
4297-E P-377
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
number of times.
*
4297-E P-378
This cycle measures the tool length for detecting broken tool at high speed. The high-speed
tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt
the sensor beam as shown in the right figure.
EIOEMR5S7005R01
Calling sequence
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*] [PRET=*]
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
set.
4297-E P-379
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).
*
4297-E P-380
5.
List of Alarms
2583
Eeoemr5s7005

[Measures to Take]
2305

6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
7B
cycle.
7C
detection cycle.
95
4297-E P-381
SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC
SECTION 9
1.
SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC
Outline
Eeoemr5s8001
If a non-contact sensor is mounted on a horizontal MC, there is an area in which
the tool interferes
with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is attached to the spindle, and consequently the tool may
strike against the sensor.
To prevent the tool from striking against the sensor, a special barrier function is adopted.
This function is intended to limit the X-axis travel depending on the Y-axis position.
2.
Detailed Specifications
2-1.
Parameter Setting
Select the parameter setting mode.
Select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) from the function menu.
The DISPLAY CHANGE popup window appears.
Eeoemr5s8002
(a) If the DISPLAY CHANGE popup window shows BARRIER (X, Y), select it to display the BARRIER (X, Y) screen.
(b) If not, select [F1] (MENU CHANGE) from the function menu.
The MENU CHANGE popup window appears.
Using the page keys or [ ] [ ] cursor keys, select BARRIER (X, Y)."
When you select [F1] (check mark) from the popup function menu in the MENU CHANGE
popup window, a checkmark is set at BARRIER (X, Y)." In this state, select [F7] (OK) from the
popup function menu in the MENU popup window to exit the MENU CHANGE popup window.
The DISPLAY CHANGE popup window is updated, and BARRIER (X, Y) is included in the popup window. So, select it to display the BARRIER (X, Y) screen.
EIOEMR5S8001R01
4297-E P-382
Barrier (X, Y) Effective/Ineffective
Effective commands : Effective/Ineffective
Initial setting
: Ineffective
P limit, N limit
Effective commands : SET, ADD
2-2.
Setting range
: -99999.999 to 99999.999
Initial value
: 0.000
Setting Items
Enable or disable the special barrier function in the upper area of the screen. Eeoemr5s8003
When Effective is selected, set the barrier data in the table of the screen lower area.
In this table, set an effective range of X- and Y-axes. At "Y", set the range where the X-axis travel is
limited, and at "X" set the X-axis travel range.
Note that the above X- and Y-axis ranges shall be set in the machine coordinate system.
Thus, a barrier alarm will occur when both of the following conditions are met.
Barrier (X, Y) effective
The Y-axis position in the machine coordinate system is within the set range.
The X-axis position in the machine coordinate system is not within the set range.
4297-E P-383
2-3.
Barrier Range Setting Example

Eeoemr5s8004
When the parameters are set as shown in Figure 1, the barrier ranges are as shown
in Figure 2.
EIOEMR5S8002R01
2-4.
Barrier Alarm and Resetting Method

Eeoemr5s8005
If the sensor enters a barrier range set by the special barrier function, the following
alarm occurs:
1203 Alarm A Barrier 2
To reset his alarm, select the manual operation mode, enable the pulse handle, and reset the NC.
First of all, reset the alarm.
After the alarm has been reset, axis movement is possible only with the pulse handle. Move the
problem axis out of the interference range using the pulse handle. At the same time, the pulse handle can move all the axes.
4297-E P-384
3.
Alarms
3-1.
Alarm A
1203
Barrier
Eeoemr5s8006
If a non-contact sensor is mounted on a horizontal MC, there is an area in

which the tool interferes with the sensor when a large-diameter tool is attached
to the spindle.
On the parameter setting screen, set a barrier as the interference range of the
X- and Y-axes.
When (Barrier Y-axis N limit Y command value Barrier Y-axis P limit), the
alarm lamp lights in either of the following cases:
(Barrier X-axis N limit value X command value) or
(Barrier X-axis P limit value X command value).
[Index]
None
[Character-string]
None
[Code]
2: Special barrier function for horizontal MC
Incorrect X-axis or Y-axis command in the program
[Measures to Take]
Review the program.
A barrier check does not take place in the manual operation mode. When the
barrier alarm lamp is lit, select the manual operation mode and reset the alarm.
After resetting, axis movement is possible only with the pulse handle. Move the
problem axis out of the barrier range using the pulse handle.
4297-E P-385
SECTION 10 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF

1.

Eeoemr5s9001
EIOEMR5S9001R01
* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the X-axis)and shifts
4297-E P-386
2.
Outline
Eeoemr5s9002
the position wherethe sensor is installed: This manufacturer's subprogram (hereinafter called the MSB) is for a fixed
sensor and can gauge vertical spindle tools.
Bit 3 of VFST
...... Fixed sensor
EIOEMR5S9002R01

Gauging program
4297-E P-387
3.
Manufacturer's Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor

The movable sensor and fixed sensor can be switched by changing the settingEeoemr5s9003
at bit 3 of the system
variable VFST. To select the fixed sensor, set ON the bit 3 of VFST.
Since this MSB is used to gauge the vertical spindle tools, be sure to set OFF bit 6 of a system variable VFST.
EIOEMR5S9003R01
Vertical spindle tool gauging is described below.
4.
Manufacturer's Subprogram for Gauging Vertical Spindle

Tools with the Fixed Sensor
The subprogram for gauging vertical spindle tools with the fixed sensor consistsEeoemr5s9004
of the following subroutines:
OO31
OO120
Position setting cycle for X-axis retract
OO93
OO94

OO95
OO96
OO99

OO95
OO96
OO97

CALL OO31
4297-E P-388
[X-axis retract position setting cycle (OO120)] (*Set this subroutine without fail.)
Use this subroutine when moving the X-axis into the machine after gauging.
* Set the X-axis position inside the machine when the ATC door is closed.
Procedure :
1 Move the X-axis to the position to be set as the X-axis retract position.
The positions of the X- and Y-axes do not affect the setting.
2 Select the automatic operation mode and execute the following subprogram:
CALL OO120
M02
The X-axis does not move even if this program is executed.
After this program has been executed, the current X-axis position is registered as the X-axis
retract position at the system work coordinate system origin No. 12. It can be checked with system variable VSZOX [12] on the check display screen.
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
CAUTION
The laser sensor mounting position of the double-column MC "MCR-AF" is outside the travel limit.
That is, gauging is performed in a range out of the control of the soft limit.
In the sensor zero setting cycle (OO93 or OO94) of this manufacturer's subprogram, the spindle
is positioned in the sensor position, and it is, therefore, necessary for the operator to move it out
of the travel limit by manual interrupt.
Perform this operation with extreme care because it is very dangerous.
4297-E P-389
Bit 7 of VFST

ON
Calling sequence
CALL OO93 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*]
[PAT=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
4297-E P-390
Set the offset amount to VATSC [185, attachment offset number].Use this number
when performing the sensor zero setting cycle using an attachment.
This MSB is not applicable to the measurement of horizontal spindle tools and can
be used only for gauging of the tool mounted with an extension attachment.
Gauging operation
1.
2.
4297-E P-391
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
The ATC door opens (disabling the Z-axis limit).
4.
The program stops on reception of M00.
5.
Select the manual interrupt mode and move the reference tool near the sensor.
The operator must perform the following operations:
Turn ON manual interrupt mode.
Manually move the reference tool close to the sensor (where the laser beam is
blocked simply by Z-axis movement).
Turn OFF manual interrupt mode.
Press the START button.
6.
The shift is canceled.
7.
8.
The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position.
9.
10. The X-axis is positioned.

11. The Z-axis moves to the under-travel position.
15. The sensor is positioned near the Z-axis positive limit.
17. The X-axis retracts.
18. The sensor retracts.
19. The ATC door closes (enabling the Z-axis limit).
4297-E P-392
breakage.
Calling sequence
[POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PIN.
Gauging operation
1.
2.
4297-E P-393
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
The program stops on reception of M00.
5.
Select the manual interrupt mode and move the reference tool near the sensor.
The operator must perform the following operations:
Turn ON manual interrupt mode.
Manually move the reference tool close to the sensor (where the laser beam is
blocked simply by Z-axis movement).
Turn OFF manual interrupt mode.
Press the START button.
6.
The shift is canceled.
7.
8.
9.
10. The X-axis is positioned at the under-travel position.

11. The Z-axis is positioned at the gauging starting position. (When PIN is specified, the Z-axis
4297-E P-394
Calling sequence
[PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] [PSAM=*] [PSPR=*] [PSRA=*]
[PRTY=*]
PLI: Tool length
times.
measured value.
[mm].
alarm).
4297-E P-395
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
The sensor is positioned at the X-axis retract position, if the machine needs retraction of Yaxis before gauging.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
4297-E P-396
Calling sequence
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
radius.
4297-E P-397
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
4297-E P-398
Calling sequence
CALL OO99 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*]
[PRE=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PLI: Tool length
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
Refer to the [Gauging in the lengthwise direction].
4297-E P-399
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The X-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
4297-E P-400
Calling sequence
CALL OO95 [PLI=*] [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
[PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*][PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
result.
make this judgment.
4297-E P-401
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
4297-E P-402
Calling sequence
[PAT=*] [PD=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
4297-E P-403
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
4297-E P-404
This cycle detects the tool length breakage.The high-speed tool breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the sensor beam as shown in
the right figure.
EIOEMR5S9005R01
Calling sequence
CALL OO97 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
set.
4297-E P-405
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The X-axis skips to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

4297-E P-406
5.
List of Alarms
2583
Eeoemr5s9005

[Measures to Take]
2305

6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
7B
cycle.
7C
detection cycle.
7E
The ATC door is not open.
81
When the Z-axis was lowered, the travel limit failed to become ineffective.
95
In several-times gauging, the difference between the maximum and the minimum
measurements exceeded the tolerance.
4297-E P-407
SECTION 11 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30/45 AT (103 VERSIONS)

1.

Eeoemr5sa001
EIOEMR5SA001R01
* Scanning gauging: The sensor gauges a tool in a gauging direction (e.g. the Y-axis)and shifts
4297-E P-408
2.
Outline
Eeoemr5sa002
Non-contact sensor gauging is classified into two methods:
Gauging with a sensor fixed at a desired position
Gauging with a movable sensor
Gauging the tool mounted in a 30/45 angular attachment (hereinafter called a 30/45 AT) is possible only with the fixed sensor.
Movable sensor
Fixed sensor

for 30/45 AT
EIOEMR5SA002R01
Bit 3 of VFST
...... Fixed sensor

Gauging program
4297-E P-409
3.
Manufacturer's Subprogram for the Fixed Sensor

Eeoemr5sa003
The movable sensor or fixed sensor can be switched by changing the setting at
the bit 3 of the system variable VFST. To gauge the tool mounted in a 30/45 AT, set ON the bit 3 of VFST.
EIOEMR5SA003R01
4297-E P-410
4.
Manufacturer's Subprogram for 30/45 AT Tool Gauging

by the Fixed Sensor
Eeoemr5sa004
The subprogram for gauging the tools mounted in the 30/45 AT with the fixed
sensor consists of
the following subroutines:
30 AT
OO31
OO32
OO123
OO124

OO125
OO126
OO129

OO125
OO126
OO127
45 AT
OO31
OO32
OO113
OO114

OO115
OO116
OO119

OO115
OO116
OO117
4297-E P-411
CALL OO31
CALL OO32
[Spindle speed]
S=F/N
Here,
speed override.
4297-E P-412
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction (OO123, OO113)]
Bit 7 of VFST

ON
Do not change this setting after you select the offset method here.
The gauging results are stored in the system work coordinates No. 25 for the tool mounted in
the 30 AT, or in the system work coordinates No. 26 for the tool mounted in the 45 AT.
Calling sequence
CALL OO123 PAXI=* PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=*
(OO113)

Set the offset amount to VATSC [184, attachment offset number].
4297-E P-413
Gauging operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
moves by angular operation in the tool lengthwise direction.)
5.
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Locate the X-axis in the gauging start position.
8.
9.
10. The Y-axis and the Z-axis move to the sensor position.
*
4297-E P-414
[Sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction (OO124, OO114)]
breakage.
The gauging results are stored in system work coordinates No. 27 for the tool mounted in the
30 AT, or in system work coordinates No. 28 for the tool mounted in the 45 AT.
Calling sequence
(OO114)
[POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*]
PIN.
When calculating the sensor zero, however, set the tip of the reference tool as the
sensor zero by taking this Z-axis infeed amount into account.
Usually the Z-axis is positioned near the positive travel limit where the gauging
cycle is finished. To hold the Z-axis after gauging, specify "1" for PCON.
Gauging operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
moves at an upward angle of 90 from the lengthwise direction.)
5.
4297-E P-415
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Position the Y-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Y-axis in a
position shifted by the Y-axis component of PIN).
7.
The X-axis is positioned at the gauging start position.
8.
Position the Z-axis at the under-travel position (if PIN is designated, locate the Z-axis in a
position shifted by the Z-axis component of PIN).
9.
*
4297-E P-416
[Gauging in the lengthwise direction (OO125, OO115)]
Calling sequence
CALL OO125 PLI=* [PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PH=*]
(OO115)
[PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*] [PSBA=*] PAT=* [PSAM=*]
PLI: Tool length
The offset must be set at VATSC [184, attachment offset designation number].
times.
measured value.
[mm].
4297-E P-417
alarm).
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Y-axis is positioned on the extension line from the sensor position in the tool lengthwise direction.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-418
[Gauging in the radial direction (OO126, OO116)]
Calling sequence
(OO116)
PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*] [PF3=*] [PF4=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
Set a distance by which the Z-axis further advances from the original advanced
distance in the sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction.
radius.
Refer to the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction and the gauging
cycle in the lengthwise direction.
4297-E P-419
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
number of times.
*
4297-E P-420
[Gauging the sphericity (OO129, OO119)]
Calling sequence
CALL OO129 [PH=*] [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRA=*] [PRS=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PRET=*]
(OO119)
PLI: Tool length
number is set.
PRI: Cutter radius
4297-E P-421
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
*
4297-E P-422
[Tool breakage detection in the lengthwise direction (OO125, OO115)]
Calling sequence
CALL OO125 [PLI=*][PRS=*] [PSPN=* [PPIC=*] [PTOL=*]] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] [PAT=*] [PH=*]
(OO115)
PLI: Tool length
result.
make this judgment.
4297-E P-423
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

number of times.
*
4297-E P-424
[Tool breakage detection in the radial direction (OO126, OO116)]
Calling sequence
(OO116)
PAT=* [PD=*] [PRET=*] [PCON=*] [PGO=*] [PLE1=*] [PLE2=*] [PF1=*] [PF2=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
cutter radius).
Set a distance by which the Z-axis further advances from the original advanced
distance in the sensor zero setting cycle in the radial direction.
See the sensor zero setting cycle in the lengthwise direction, the gauging cycle in
the lengthwise direction, and the tool breakage detection cycle in the lengthwise
direction.
4297-E P-425
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
number of times.
*
4297-E P-426
[High-speed tool breakage detection (OO127, OO117)]
This cycle measure the tool length to detect broken tool at high speed. The high-speed tool
breakage detection is executed on the assumption that a broken tool does not interrupt the
sensor beam as shown in the right figure.
EIOEMR5SA005R01
Calling sequence
CALL OO127 [PLI=*] [PRI=*] [PRS=*] [PIN=*] [PUDT=*] [POVT=*] PAT=* [PH=*] [PRET=*]
(OO117)
[PCON=*]
PLI: Tool length
PRI: Cutter radius
set.
4297-E P-427
Cycle operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The Y-axis and the Z-axis skip to the target position (sensor position + over travel position).

*
4297-E P-428
5.
List of Alarms
2583
Eeoemr5sa005

[Measures to Take]
2305

6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
7B
cycle.
7C
detection cycle.
95
96
The attachment type does not match the gauging program number.
Vertical/Horizontal spindles
In execution of OO95, OO96, OO97, or OO99, no attachment is
mounted, or the attachment is not extension one, 90 angular one, or
B-/C-axis one.
97
The attachment is not indexed to an angle where measurement is possible.

30 angular AT
Not indexed to C270
45 angular AT
Not indexed to C270
Vertical/Horizontal spindles 90 angular AT not indexed to C270
B-/C-axis AT indexed to B90 but not indexed to C270
99
The vertical/horizontal spindle tool command (bit 6 of VFST) is wrong.

"1" (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when no attachment was mounted or
an extension AT was mounted for vertical/horizontal spindle measurement.
Or, "0" (horizontal spindle) is set at bit 6 of VFST when 90 angular AT or B-/C-axis
AT is mounted.
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
Publication No.
Date
Edition
4297-E
January 2000
2nd
4297-E-R1
October 2000
3rd
4297-E-R2
February 2001
4th
4297-E-R3
September 2002
5th
4297-E-R4
December 2002
6th
4297-E-R5
July 2004
7th
4297-E-R6
August 2004
8th
This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that pecifications are subject to change without notice.
If you requireclarification or further explanation of any point in this manual, please
contact your OKUMA representative.

Me 51221 R 08 A Gauging 335220150816

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Me 51221 R 08 A Gauging 335220150816

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GAUGING SYSTEMS

Precautions Relating to Machine Installation

Points to Check before Turning on the Power

Precautions Relating to Operation

Precautions Relating to the ATC

Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When

Symbols Used in This Manual

Indicates precautions relating to operation or use.

SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC GAUGING FUNCTION ........................................................94

SECTION 3 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION ..................................................170

SECTION 4 GAUGING DATA OUTPUT TO FILE .......................................................177

SECTION 5 MANUAL GAUGING ................................................................................181

SECTION 6 INTERACTIVE GAUGING FUNCTION....................................................257

SECTION 7 NON-CONTACT SENSOR CALCULATION FUNCTION.........................308

SECTION 8 NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR

SECTION 9 SPECIAL BARRIER FUNCTION FOR HORIZONTAL MC ......................381

SECTION 10NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR MCR-AF.........385

SECTION 11NON-CONTACT SENSOR GAUGING FUNCTION FOR 30/45 AT

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH OFFSET/

Displaying the Result of Gauging

When the extend key is pressed.

The function menu relating to gauging result processing is described below.

MSB ZERO ON/OFF

MSB TOOL ON/OFF

Displays the values set for the system variables.

1-2-1. TOOL/ZERO Function Key

1-2-2. MSB ZERO ON/OFF Function Key

1-2-3. MSB TOOL ON/OFF Function Key

1-2-4. SENSstat ON/OFF Function Key

1-2-5. VARIOUS ON/OFF Function Key

Automatic Tool Length Offset/Automatic Tool Breakage

Setting the zero point for the

Setting the correspondence

Executing automatic tool length

Setting the tool change

Executing automatic tool

Checking for breakage

Pallet change, etc.

Zero point setting is necessary only when the

Make sure that the tool length offset value is

Call the tool whose tool length offset data is to be

Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point

2-1-1. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Z-axis)

Relative offset type

Absolute offset type

Length from the spindle nose

Relative offset type

Absolute offset type

2-1-3. Setting the Touch Sensor Zero Point (Y-axis)

CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0(or accurate length of reference tool)

CALL OO30 PAXI=#17H PLI=0 PY=10 (VFST=1)

Accurate radius of reference tool

Setting the Tool Pot No./Tool No. Table

Assign a tool number

Magazine capacity: 10 tools

Write the correspondence between the

Operation Mode Designation

Automatic tool breakage detection cycle

Automatic tool length offset cycle

Designates the relative offset type.

Designates the absolute offset type.

Only Z-axis offset